Home

Nortel Networks 1000E Telephone User Manual

1. Enter the command REQ KEKE End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 206 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Enabling the multi user option Follow Procedure 49 to enable the multi user option Procedure 49 Enabling the multi user option 1 Enter the commana LD 17 System response CFN000 MEM AVAIL U P 1015918 USED U P 138773 24956 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 2 Enter the command REQ chg 3 Enter the command TYPE ovly 4 Enter the command MULTI_USER on System response MEM AVAIL U P 1015893 USED U P 138773 24981 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 5 Enter the command REQ kkkk End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 207 of 488 Configuring pseudo terminals PTYs CS 1000E provides two ports COM1 and COM2 on the CPU A Terminal Server is used to provide additional serial ports for specific applications such as ACD BGD CTY MCT PMS and TRF Each configured Terminal Server serial port automatically starts an rlogin session with a user ID to a dedicated pseudo PTY port in the CS 1000E
2. Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 308 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 30 Central Office amp Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections Part 2 of 2 Cable from equipment Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Lead designations 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 309 of 488 Table 31 Central Office Trunk connections Part 1 of 2 Cable from equipment Lead designations Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 310 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 31 Central Office Trunk connections Part 2 of 2 Cable from equipment Lead designations Trunk connections UK Trunk connections for the UK are provided in the following tables Table 32 NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations on page 311 Table 33 NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross connect terminations on page 312 Table 34 NT5K19 2W paging mode terminations on page 314 Table 35 NT5K19 2W Type mode terminations on page 314 Table 36 NT5K19 4W Type mode terminations on page 316 Table 37 NT5K19 AC15 mode pair terminations on page 317 Table 38 NT5K19 Recorded Announcement mode pair terminatio
3. 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 481 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration Customer Data Block Figure 3 6S0V ESS 90 LO0E Wdd 90 1008 ESS WV 90 1008 SS udu 90 1L008 SS SVO XXX SZZ 99 13N 90 1 008 ESS dow ESS 90 LOOE ESS 34d 90 1008 ESS 4d 00L LE9Z ESS ado 908 L008 ESS S39 LIN Naq 1NI aMd WIL BIOS Na sjuswjyeol piomssed SJOUWLL 1U6IN pels ydeo19 u Sta yoolg geq wasn 908 L008 E99 WSI 009 L008 99 1st 001 1892 SS svo tld suondo aunyea4 90 LO0E ESS OLL L292 SS vou dSH 90 1008 ESS NMY LLY ajosuog uepu y 9LE LLEZ ESS 90 LOOE ESS INV ado nejeq Installation and Configuration Communication Server 1000E Page 482 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration MG 1000T card slot assignment The MG 1000T Core and MG 1000T Expansion contain physical card slots numbered 1 to 10 When configuring the system the physical card slot numbers must be transposed to logical card slot numbers For example to configure a card physically located in slot 2 of the first MG 1000T Expansion use logical slot 12 To configure a card physically located in slot 2 of the second MG 1000T Expansion use logical slot 22 See Table 63 Table 1 MG 1000T card slot assignments Media Gateway Expansion Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logi
4. 287 Procedure 75 Connecting a trunk 2 00s cece ee eee eee 294 Procedure 76 Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP TEIGDNONY Node cc nde reesei cincensinii cans reine 321 Procedure 77 Adding voice gateway channels using Element MANAGE chsceesnessidcew dendiucdsd gine raei 325 Procedure 78 Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 328 Procedure 79 Installing the CompactFlash 2000055 332 Procedure 80 Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot 338 Procedure 81 Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status 340 Procedure 82 Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels 00 00005 341 Procedure 83 Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card UNS in 6 6044456000404 0600060440000004 60088 344 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 24 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 84 Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card 00 cece eee eee eee 347 Procedure 85 Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element MANAGED cise sieeeteses tucsseddd ee tueweetiemes 347 Procedure 86 Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager 2200es eee e eee eeeeeeee 348 Procedure 87 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager cs ict canieesseines de cdeee Suc centy sas 349 Procedure 88 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Mana
5. TIME Where xx 1 19 R 0 Note Do not change the configuration for the default console port 20 Specify the character to be transferred for lt CR gt in telnet Enter EWLINE define port xx TELNET N Define the port baud rate to equal the baud rate of the CS 1000E COM port Enter define port xx speed BAUDRATE FILTERING CR Where xx Port number from 1 19 and BAUDRATE the baud rate of the connected Call Server COM port Logout Enter logout port xx Check the configuration Enter list port xx alternate chara list port xx telnet chara Run telnet on the PC a In Windows Start gt Run Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 260 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server b Enter the Input telnet command Enter the command TELNET XXX XX X XX XXXX Where XXX XX X XX Terminal Server IP Address XXxX telnet port for port 1 to 19 Note The value of the target telnet port xxxx is determined using the following formula TELNET PORT 2 000 port number x 100 For example if the telnet port is 7 then TELNET PORT 2 000 port number x 100 2 000 700 2700 If the Terminal Server IP Address is 172 16 3 50 and the telnet port is 7 then TELNET command line is TELNET 172 16 3 50 2700 Example telnet 172 16 3 50 2000 telnet to virtual management port telnet 172 16 3 50 2700 telnet
6. Note The Signaling Server is shipped with the Admin Serial port set to 19200 bit s During the initial installation the unit requires the PC Maintenance terminal settings as provided in Step 2 on page 274 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 274 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Figure 90 Maintenance to Signaling Server connection serial oe PC Maintenance Terminal 2 The COM port on the PC Maintenance terminal should be set as follows e Terminal type VT100 e Speed 19200 e Data bits 8 e Parity none e Stop bits 1 e Flow control none After the installation the Signaling Server maintenance port speed can be changed See Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 End of Procedure BayStack 470 SDI connection The SDI port on the Bay Stack 470 can be used for basic configuration and maintenance The SDI port is located on the faceplate It is a DCE port with a default speed of 9600 bps Media Card SDI connection The SDI ports on a Media Card can be used for basic configuration or maintenance Figure 91 shows the maintenance port location on the Media Card and the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Page 275 of 488 Figure 91 Maintenance port location on the Media Card and the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter Sh
7. 13T BK G 13R G BK 14T BK BR 14R BR BK 15T BK S 15R S BK 16T Y BL 16R BL Y Note Remaining pairs are spare Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 298 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card E amp M Trunk card connections Table 22 lists the connections required by the E amp M Trunk card NT8D15 Table 22 NT8D15 E amp M Trunk card Part 1 of 2 Cables Card 1 through 2W Card 10 from Paging equipment mode Designations 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 299 of 488 Table 22 NT8D15 E amp M Trunk card Part 2 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Card 10 from equipment Designations 9T R BR 9R BR R 10T R S 10R S R 11T BK BL 11R BL BK 12T BK O 12R O BK 13T BK G 13R G BK 14T BK BR 14R BR BK 15T BK S 15R S BK 16T Y BL A 16R BL Y PG Note A and B are the transmit and receive pairs where TA Transmit Tip and RA Receive Tip TB Transmit Ring and RB Receive Ring Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 300 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Trunk connections Europe Trunk connections for Europe are provided in the following tables e Table 23 E amp M TIE trunk card 2 Wire on page 300
8. Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 398 of 488 Table 44 IP Phone 2001 components list Part 2 of 2 Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 230 VAC 50 60 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe A0619635 Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in AC to AC 8W 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand A0647042 Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA A0828858 Table 45 lists the IP Phone 2002 package components and product codes Table 45 IP Phone 2002 components list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2002 package contents include e IP Phone 2002 e Handset e Handset cord e Footstand e 7ft Cats Ethernet cable e Getting Started card IP Phone 2002 Ethergray with Icon keycaps NTDU91AA16 A0533404 IP Phone 2002 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA16 A0533405 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU91AA70 A0533406 IP Phone 2002 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU91BA70 A0533407 Replacement parts 7 ft Cats Ethernet cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 Handset Charcoal A0758634 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 399 of 488 Table 45 IP Phone 2002 components list Part 2 of 2 Handset cord Ethergray A0897725 Handset cord Charcoal N0000763 Foots
9. Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 337 of 488 Table 40 TN assignments for MG 1000E MG 1000E Expander 000 0 01 000 O 02 000 0 03 000 O 04 000 0 07 000 0 08 000 0 09 000 0 10 000 1 01 000 1 02 000 1 03 000 1 04 000 1 07 000 1 08 000 1 09 000 1 10 004 0 01 004 0 02 004 0 03 004 O 04 004 0 07 004 0 08 004 0 09 004 0 10 004 1 01 004 1 02 004 1 03 004 1 04 004 1 07 004 1 08 004 1 09 004 1 10 008 O 01 008 O 02 008 0 03 008 O 04 008 0 07 008 O 08 008 0 09 008 0 10 008 1 01 008 1 02 008 1 03 008 1 04 008 1 07 008 1 08 008 1 09 008 1 10 012 001 012 0 02 012 0 03 012 0 04 012 0 07 012 0 08 012 0 09 0120 10 012 1 01 012 1 02 012 1 03 012 1 04 012 1 07 012 1 08 012 1 09 012 1 10 016 0 01 016 0 02 016 0 03 016 0 04 016 0 07 016 0 08 016 0 09 016 0 10 016 1 01 016 1 02 016 1 03 016 1 04 016 1 07 016 1 08 016 1 09 016 1 10 020 0 01 020 0 02 020 0 03 020 0 04 020 0 07 020 0 08 020 0 09 020 0 10 020 1 01 020 1 02 020 1 03 020 1 04 020 1 07 020 1 08 020 1 09 020 1 10 024 0 01 024 0 02 024 0 03 024 0 04 024 0 07 024 0 08 024 0 09 0240 10 024 1 01 024 1 02 024 1 03 024 1 04 024 1 07 024 1 08 024 1 09 024 1 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 252 0 01 252 0 02 252 0 03 252 0 04 252 0 07 252 0 08 252 0 09 252 0 10 252 1 01 252 1 02 252 1
10. 10 000 100 000 Kbps p2 Intrazone preferred strategy BQ for Best Quality or BB for Best Bandwidth p3 Interzone available bandwidth 0 10 000 100 000 Kbps p4 Interzone preferred strategy BQ for Best Quality or BB for Best Bandwidth p5 Zone resource type shared or private NEW ZONE xxx Create a new zone with default values for the parameters p1 10 000 Kbps p2 BQ p3 10 000 Kbps p4 BQ p5 shared CHG ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Change parameters of a zone All parameters including those that are unchanged must be re entered OUT ZONE xxx Remove a zone DIS ZONE xxx Disable a zone When a zone is disabled no new calls are established inside from or toward this zone ENL ZONE xxx Enable a zone PRT ZONE xxx Print zone and bandwidth information End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 213 of 488 The type of any Bandwidth Management Zone for MG 1000E with conference resources configured must be shared Distortion in Music is expected when G 729AB codec is used Hence the Interzone and the Intrazone policies for an MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zone should have Best Quality to give preference to G711 codec to minimize of occurrence of music distortion IMPORTANT Currently the CS 1000E only supports Recorded Announcement Broadcast and Music Broadcast Ensure that the bandwidth pr
11. DEFINE PORT 2 USERNAME pty7 Note When typing the letters pty they must be lower case letters The number must equal the pty number configured on the system Log out of the port Enter the command LOGOUT PORT 2 End of Procedure Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on board modem The MRV IR 8020M Terminal Server is equipped with a V 90 K56flex 56 Kbps on board modem The modem port is 23 Follow Procedure 68 to access an MRV Console Port through the on board modem Procedure 68 Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on board modem 1 2 3 4 Connect an analog telephone line to the MRV telephone line port Set up the remote PC connection Dial in to the MRV onboard modem from the PC From the PC run HyperTerminal Enter the command ATD phone number Screen response CONNECT 9600 ARQ V34 LAPM V42BIS Login Log in to the In Reach Element Manager using the default password see steps 4 5 6 and 7 in Procedure 62 on page 256 End of Procedure Once logged in to the on board modem it is possible to telnet to ports 1 20 It is also possible to rlogin to different IPs 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server CS 1000E COM port types Page 265 of 488 Table 17 lists various components of the CS 1000E system and their COM port types Table 17 System components and COM port type System component COM port type Baystack 460 Baystack
12. Getting CDR file for EXP_CAB lt num gt Ready to transmit Select the XModem protocol on the PC to receive the CDR file Use the Hyperterminal transfer function to receive the file using XModem protocol Rename the file to indicate which MG 1000T Expansion the CDR data is from Note Use a filename that does not overwrite any DBA specific files if DBA is used to retrieve CDR Traffic files from the MG 1000T Parse the CDR file into the MG 1000T s database on the PC Refer to the OTM NTPs for how to process CDR records for billing applications End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 477 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INGCIBONON so ins 4 oo ERAGE erdia ERR SeEEED EAS hws 479 Basic system configuro ee eaaa 479 MG 1000T card slot assignment 0c 0s cscs nese eernvwesaws 484 TN assieme sc asdcu sake oetiwekceeetdivetseuwetneesace 485 This chapter shows overlay LD sequences required to configure the system with basic telephony features Your Planning and Engineering group provides the details needed to configure basic telephony Note The Command Line Interface CLI must be used for some configuration for example LD 10 and LD 11 before Element Manager can be used to further configure basic telephony This chapter contains Procedure 123 Configuring the basic system on page 480 Basic
13. Global 10 Languages Western Europe 10 Languages Eastern Europe 10 Languages North America 6 Languages Spare Group A Spare Group B WAU BP WN FP Packaged Languages Q uit lt CR gt default By default option 1 will be selected Enter your choice gt x gt Copying new PSDL 16 Successful installation confirmation appears Enter lt CR gt to continue Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool Software release xxxx was installed successfully lon Core 1 All files were copied from RMD to FMD Please press lt CR gt when ready Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 134 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 17 Select option lt b gt Install DEFAULT database from the database installation main menu Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool You will now perform the database installation Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Install CUSTOMER database The Removable Media Device containing the Customer database must be in the drive lt b gt Install the DEFAULT database The System S W media must be in drive lt c gt Transfer the previous system database The floppy disk containing the customer database must be in the floppy drive of the MMDU pack lt e gt Check the database that exists on the Fixed Media Device lt q gt Quit Enter ch
14. Handset cord charcoal Footstand charcoal N0000764 A0538587 IP Phone 2007 power adapter Global power adapter N0014020 IP Phone 2007 power cords Cord 9 9 ft NA Power NEMA 125Vac 134 NA M East Taiwan Indonesia Philippines Korea Thailand Vietnam Japan NTTK14AB Cord 8 ft ANA Power AS 3 240Vac 10A Australia New Zealand PRC NTTK15AA Option 11C Standard European Power Cord 250Vac Other EMEA Kenya NTTK16AB Option 11C Swiss Power Cord 9 9 ft 125Vac Switzerland NTTK17AB Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 402 of 488 Table 47 IP Phone 2007 component list Part 2 of 2 Option 11C UK Power Cord 240Vac NTTK18AB Hong Kong Ireland UK Singapore Malaysia India Bangladesh Pakistan Brunei Sri Lanka Option 11C Denmark Power Cord Kit 9 9 ft 125Vac NTTK22AB Denmark Table 48 lists the IP Phone ACP 2033 package components and product codes Table 48 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 componenis list IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal NTEX11AA70 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable Power Interface Module PIM with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card Universal power supply IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 package contents include IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 charcoal ES Ip 7 f
15. Installing an SSC NTM400 Software daughterboard and NTDK57 NT_REM remote security device on page 227 2 Procedure 57 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port to an SSC on page 227 3 Procedure 58 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port to an SSC on page 231 Adding a software daughterboard and remote security device A software daughterboard NTM400 and a remote security device NTDK57 NT_REM must be installed on the SSC Follow Procedure 56 to install these required components 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a Small System Controller Page 227 of 488 Procedure 56 Installing an SSC NTM400 Software daughterboard and NTDK57 NT_REM remote security device CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Static electricity can damage circuit cards Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit cards or any of their components 1 Unpack the NTDK20 SSC and set it aside on a clean surface 2 Install the NTM400 Software daughterboard in the appropriate connector as shown in Figure 84 on page 233 3 Press firmly on the standoffs to ensure that the NTM400 Software daughterboard is secured to the SSC 4 Insert the NTDK57 NT_REM Security Device with NT_REM facing out See Figure 84 on page 233 5 Repeat procedure for each SSC End of Procedure Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port Follow Procedure 57 to add a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port to an SSC Procedure 57 Adding a
16. Please enter the data networking and IP Telephony parameters for this Leader Signaling Server Node ID 276 Hostname SS_Node276_Ldr AN IP 192 168 10 20 AN subnet mask 255 255 255 0 AN gateway IP 192 168 10 1 LAN IP 192 168 20 20 LAN subnet mask 255 255 255 0 LAN gateway IP 192 168 20 1 IP 192 168 10 20 Server IP 192 168 10 10 Figure 69 Follower Signaling Server configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx This Follower Signaling Server will obtain its data network and IP telephony configuration from the Leader Signaling Server at boot To identify this Signaling Server please enter a Hostname Hostname SS_Node276_Ldr 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 191 of 488 Figure 70 Stand alone Signaling Server configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please define the Signaling Server management access Hostname LAN IP LAN subnet mask LAN gateway IP LAN IP LAN subnet mask LAN gateway IP data networking parameters for this Standalone Note that the ELAN parameters are necessary for e g SNMP SS_SA 192 168 255 255 192 168 192 168 255 255 192 168 14 Enter the Primary NRS IP address or the Alternate NRS IP address depending on the option entered in step 11 on page 187 o
17. Procedure 120 Configuring the IP telephony node for Alternate primary controller 000 0eeeeee 473 Procedure 121 Verifying the operation of a Voice Gateway Media Card in an MG 1000T expansion in Survivable Mode 200ce cece eee ee eee 475 Procedure 122 Retrieving CDR files using XModem 476 Procedure 123 Configuring the basic system 2 0005 480 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 28 of 488 List of Procedures 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 29 of 488 About this document Subject This document is a global document Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area This document provides the information necessary to install and configure a Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000E system WARNING Before a CS 1000E system can be installed a network assessment must be performed and the network must be VoIP ready If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met the system will not operate properly For information on the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 Note on legacy products and releases This NTP contains information about systems components and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Releas
18. The 19 Inch Rack Mount Kit NTTKO9 contains the following accessories e 1 left guide bracket e 1 right guide bracket e left ear bracket e right ear bracket e 4 8 32 machine screws Follow Procedure 2 on page 78 to remove the cover on a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander Procedure 2 Removing the cover 1 If the cover lock latches are in their locked position a Use a flat screwdriver to slide the icon away from the latch Refer to Figure 14 on page 79 b Slide both spring loaded latches simultaneously down toward the bottom of the Media Gateway and pull forward Then lift the cover upward to remove it from the Media Gateway Refer to Figure 15 on page 79 Note The bottom of the front cover is supported by but not secured to the Media Gateway Do not drop it 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 79 of 488 Figure 14 Unlock the latches Figure 15 Unlock the cover End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 80 of 488 Rack mounting the components Procedure 3 Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander 1 Fasten the right guide bracket to the right rack support a Insert two 10 32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the guide bracket and into the respective holes in the right rack support See Figure 16 b Fasten the screws Figure 16 Guide bracket installed i
19. e Table 24 E amp M 2 wire Type 2 on page 301 e Table 25 E amp M TIE Trunk card 4 Wire on page 302 e Table 26 E amp M TIE Trunk card on page 304 e Table 27 E amp M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections on page 305 e Table 28 E amp M 2 wire Recorded Announcement Trunk connections on page 306 e Table 29 E amp M 2 wire Music Trunk connections on page 307 e Table 30 Central Office amp Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections on page 307 e Table 31 Central Office Trunk connections on page 309 Table 23 E amp M TIE trunk card 2 Wire Part 1 of 2 Column 3 Cables Card 1 through Card 10 Column 1 Column 2 Type 5 from equipment Paging Paging BPO Lead Designations TO RO 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Table 23 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card E amp M TIE trunk card 2 Wire Part 2 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Card from equipment 10 Column 1 Paging Column 2 Paging Page 301 of 488 Column 3 Type 5 BPO Table 24 E amp M 2 wire Lead designations Type 2 Part 1 of 2 Pair color Unit number TO RO W O O W E1 E2 W G G W M1 M2 W G G W T1 R1 R BL BL R E1 E2 R O O R M1 M2 Communication Server 1000E R G G R Installation and Configuration Page 302 of 488 Installing and cross con
20. 5 Rename the database rec file to bak 6 Rename the database tmp file to rec SURVIVALBLE MG 1000T Expansion External PCMCIA Drive RES command operation Main Memory database in use database tmp database bak Primary Flash Drive Backup Flash Drive Main Memory database tmp database bak Backup Flash Drive 553 AAA2049 Primary Flash Drive 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 471 of 488 Figure 158 RIB command RIB command operation 1 Rename the database rec file to bak Main Memory 2 Copy backup database to primar P P y database in use 9 o 8 S S i g database bak External Primary Backup PCMCIA Drive Flash Drive Flash Drive The same sequence of steps are performed on the Survivable MG 1000T Expansion Main Memory 3 Rename the database rec file to bak 4 Copy backup database to primary database in use database bak SURVIVALBLE MG 1000T Expansion External Primary Backup PCMCIA Drive Flash Drive Flash Drive 553 AAA2050 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 472 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion Follow Procedure 119 to configure a survivable MG 1000T Expansion Procedure 119 Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion The d
21. Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in Element Manager Note After software installation and reboot the Follower Signaling Server sends out BootP requests and waits for a response Because the Follower Signaling Server has not booted successfully before it waits for a non existing BootP response Do not wait for this response proceed to the next steps In Element Manager 1 Click Edit on the Node Configuration web page see Figure 132 on page 373 Click Add beside the Signaling Server row Enter the Follower Signaling Server data to an IP telephony node Include the ELAN MAC address used to answer BootP requests Click Save and Transfer to save the changes and the Leader Signaling Server then obtains a copy of the node files Click OK to save the node configuration to the CS 1000E and transfer the configuration to all elements When the file transfer is complete the Transfer Status web page appears The Leader Signaling Server responds to the Follower Signaling Server s BootP request The Follower Signaling Server initializes its network interfaces Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 380 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node The Follower Signaling Server attempts to FTP the BOOTP TAB file from the node master Leader Signaling Server Note Since the Follower cannot obtain the system login and password the FTP fails for first time Follower Signaling Ser
22. Description and Installation 553 3001 211 for card placement into card slots Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 290 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card IMPORTANT Digital Trunk cards can be installed only in slots 1 to 4 of the Media Gateway Figure 96 shows the circuit card slots in a Media Gateway To view the circuit card slots available in a Media Gateway Expander see Figure 97 on page 291 Figure 96 Circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway Slot 0 553 CSE9025 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 291 of 488 Figure 97 Circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway Expander Slot 7 553 CSE9032 WARNING Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid installing telephone wiring during a lightning storm Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 292 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Before you proceed install the cable from the slot that contains the Line card associated with the telephone being connected Refer to Installing the Main Distribution Frame on page 353 if you require additional cable installation DANGE
23. Figure 9 on page 57 shows the Media Gateway Expander and Table 5 on page 57 describes the expander Figure 9 Media Gateway Expander Slot 7 553 CSE9032 Table 5 Media Gateway Expander profile Part 1 of 3 Order Code e NTDU15 Height e less than 5 U 1 U 1 3 4 inch or 4 4 cm Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 58 of 488 System components Table 5 Media Gateway Expander profile Part 2 of 3 Property Description Power status indicator Nortel logo is located on the unit s faceplate Power cord connector is located on the right rear when viewed from the front Power On Off switch is located behind the faceplate See Figure 8 on page 56 Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable Unit is AC powered 100 240 VAC DC is not supported Cooling Forced air cooling with side to side air flow The fans are temperature controlled The fans run at a reduced speed at room temperature Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 59 of 488 Table 5 Media Gateway Expander profile Part 3 of 3 Property Description Card slots Four usable universal card slots 7 to 10 See Figure 9 on page 57 Logical slots 5 and 6 are not supported Slots 7 to 10 support Analog Trunk cards maximum four Analog Line cards maximum four Digital Line cards
24. IP Phone Installer Passwords is an optional feature that provides protection against unauthorized modification of the TN on the IP Phones For detailed information about the IP Phone Installer Passwords see JP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Phone Installer Passwords are configured on either a Signaling Server or a Media Card in a node The passwords then apply to all components in the node Procedure 105 Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer Note This procedure can also be performed from the CLI of a Signaling Server or Media Card 1 Login to Element Manager 2 Select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Maintenance and Reports from the navigator The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens as shown in Figure 115 on page 340 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 418 of 488 3 Click the desired node to expand it 4 Click GEN CMD for the chosen Signaling Server or Media Card The General Commands web page opens as shown in Figure 145 Figure 145 General Commands Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Maintenance and Reports General Commands General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 100 Element Type SS Group x Command Select A Group x RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings 3 PING Click a
25. Success CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Software version x xx xx was installed successfully All files were copied to the hard disk Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 184 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 60 IP Phone firmware CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx The installation source contains multiple Internet Telephone firmware files Copying cd0 0603Bxx bin to u fw 0603Bxx bin Copying cd0 0602Bxx bin to u fw 0602Bxx bin Copying cd0 0604Dxx bin to u fw 0604Dxx bin Figure 61 Voice Gateway Media Card loadware CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx The installation source contains multiple Voice Gateway Media Card loadware files Copying cd0 IPL4xxxx p2 to u fw IPL4xxxx p2 Copying cd0 IPL4xxxx sa to u fw IPL4xxxx sa The system echoes the ELAN network interface MAC address For future reference the ELAN MAC address is 00 02 b3 c5 51 c6 This address is found on the face of the Signaling Server on the right hand side when the bezel door is open Note The ELAN network interface MAC address must be configured in the Element Manager node configuration web page 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Pag
26. add value and click on Submit P Cancel 4 Choose the STAT Get card status command from the Card Commands drop down list 5 Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box 6 Click Submit to the right of the text box The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 347 of 488 Procedure 84 Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 119 on page 344 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 Select Select by Functionality The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in Figure 120 on page 345 The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 Choose the STAT Get unit status command from the Unit Commands drop down list Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box Click Submit to the right of the text box The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half
27. contains two NTDK95 cables used to connect the Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway One cable provides DS 30X connectivity while the second cable provides CE MUX connectivity to slot 10 only Procedure 21 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 1 Connect one NTDK95 cable from the CE MUX connector at the back of the Media Gateway to the CE MUX connector at the back of the Media Gateway Expander Tighten the screws on the connectors 3 Connect the other NTDK95 cable from the DS 30X connector at the back of the Media Gateway to the DS 30X connector at the back of the Media Gateway Expander 4 Tighten the screws on the connectors Figure 36 on page 117 shows the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander connected with the two NTDK95 cables 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 117 of 488 Figure 36 Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander connections I NTDK95 cables CE MUX connector DS 30X connector End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 118 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 119 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INGCUMCNON 0 he ehd es Gok bpedds oedEeRRORG EERE EREEEEAS SWS 119 Iistalling IRE SOME een cieetten nee ETEA 120 Testing
28. m Home page You can change which page to use for your home page Address Use Current Use Default Use Blank gt Temporary Internetfiles A Pages you view on the Internet are stored in a special folder for quick viewing later Delete Cookies Delete Files History The History folder contains links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keep pages in history 0 Clear History Colors Fonts Languages Accessibility OK Cancel Apply 3 On the General tab under the Temporary Internet files section click Settings The Settings window opens see Figure 129 on page 369 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 369 of 488 Figure 129 Temporary Internet files Settings window axi Z s Check for newer versio o C Every time you start Internet Explorer ns of stored pages C Automatically C Never m Temporary Internet files folder Current location C Documents and Settings nibovd Local Settings Temporary Internet Files Amount of disk space to use 4 361 S MB Move Folder View Files View Objects oree 4 Click Every visit to the page This checks for new versions of stored pages on every visit to the web page 5 Click OK in the Settings window Click OK in the Internet Options window End of Procedur
29. must be at the top of the bracket and face the front of the Media Gateway WARNING A Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander each weighs approximately 30 Ib 13 5 kg with circuit cards installed and 26 Ib 12 kg without circuit cards installed If necessary get assistance when lifting the equipment 5 Place the Media Gateway on the guide brackets a Carefully slide the Media Gateway into the rack until the ear brackets come to rest against the rack support Note Make sure that the rear of the Media Gateway is on the guide brackets See Figure 18 on page 82 6 Use the four remaining 10 32 machine screws to fasten the Media Gateway to the rack supports two screws on each side Figure 18 Media Gateway installed in a rack Use two screws on each side to fasten the Media Gateway End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 83 of 488 Rack mounting a Signaling Server This procedure describes how to install the Signaling Server hardware into the 19 inch rack Refer to Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 for additional information Note Save the packaging container and packing materials in the event you need to package the server for reshipment Procedure 4 Preparing a Signaling Server for rack mounting 1 Ensure that the following parts are included with the Signaling Server a 2 chassis support brackets A b 2 rack mounti
30. on page 390 e Procedure 101 Connecting an attendant console on page 391 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 384 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Before you proceed install the cable from the slot that contains the Line card associated with the telephone being connected Refer to Installing the Main Distribution Frame on page 353 if you require additional cable installation DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Refer to the Circuit Card Description and Installation 553 3001 211 for full descriptions of country specific IPE cards and their installation procedures Figure 139 and Figure 140 on page 385 show the circuit card assignments for the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander Refer to these figures to make sure that you have all circuit cards inserted in the correct slots 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Page 385 of 488 Figure 139 Circuit card assignments in a Media Gateway Se SB Za SE Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 SSC 553 CSE9025 Figure 140 Circuit card assignme
31. 0 CH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 15 USED 1 TOT 16 12 Enter the command ADAN Checking PTY status Follow Procedure 51 to check the PTY status Procedure 51 Checking PTY status End of Procedure Pseudo terminals show enabled only if you are using them 1 Enter the command LD 37 2 Enter the command STAT System response aan a a ae ry ry Y Y Y WN RO ENBL ENBL ENBL ENBI sides BL DES ether 1 DS DES DES DES L DES Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 210 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server TTY 13 DSBL DES ether 2 TTY 14 DSBL DES ether 3 3 Enter the command RRKEK 4 Perform an EDD to save your changes End of Procedure Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits must be defined for use by each MG 1000E Use LD 17 to add Virtual Tone and Conference circuits VXCT Each VXCT consists of two loops The VXCT must start with an even loop number The Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits in the same MG 1000E must occupy contiguous double loops For easy management Nortel recommends to start the VXCT loops from a loop number high enough for example 60 to leave enough superloop number for all MG 1000E superloops If an MG 1000E has two Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits and the starting loop is 60 VXCTs 60 and 62 must be configu
32. 00 SCH MTC BUG CTY 14 10 SURVIVAL MODE OVL111 IDLE 3 Return to Normal Mode using the SBFS command in LD 135 The MG 1000T Expansion and Voice Gateway Media Card reboots again Note Due to the reboot of the Voice Gateway Media Card after the MG 1000T Expansion has gone into Survival Mode there is a slight incremental delay before the IP Phones become operational End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 476 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Retrieving CDR records from a survivable MG 1000T Expansion The XCDR command file retrieval in LD 143 transfers the CDR file from the survivable MG 1000T Expansion directly to the PC connected to the MG 1000T Core Use the following procedure to retrieve the CDR files stored on the survivable MG 1000T Expansion one file in each MG 1000T Expansion Procedure 122 Retrieving CDR files using XModem 1 Connect a PC to the MG 1000T Core either remotely using a modem or directly using an SDI cable and a modem eliminator Using a terminal emulation program such as Hyperterminal establish a TTY session with the MG 1000T through the modem or SDI cable Log in and access LD 143 on the MG 1000T Core Enter the following command XCDR The system prompts for the MG 1000T Expansion number Enter the MG 1000T Expansion number on which the lt dba cdr gt file is stored The system prints the following
33. 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server Page 263 of 488 Check port configuration Enter the command LIST PORT xx LIST PORT xx ALTERNAT E CHARA Where xx port number End of Procedure Configuring a transparent rlogin port with sample data Sample data has been incorporated into Procedure 67 This configuration shows that a device connected to MRV Port 2 will rlogin 47 11 166 76 through pty 10 Procedure 67 Configuring a transparent rlogin port 1 Enable keepalive timer 1 for the port Enter the command DEFINE PORT 2 IP TCP KEEPALIVE TIMER 1 Enable a dedicated service using rlogin Enter the command DEFINE PORT 2 RLOGIN DEDICATED SERVICE 47 11 166 76 Enable the port to be accessible only by local command and from a serial connection only Enter the command DEFINE PORT 2 ACCESS LOCAL Enable the In Reach Element Manager to complete a ZMODEM transfer using the rlogin feature Enter the command D Enable autoconnect for the port Enter the command EFINE PORT 2 RLOGIN TRANSPARENT MODE ENABLED DEFINE PORT 2 AUTOCONNECT ENABLED Enable autodedicate for the port Enter the command DEFINE PORT 2 AUTODEDICATED ENABLED Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 264 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server 7 Define a user name for the port Enter the command
34. 1 on the back of each Media Gateway Note 3 The NTDUO609 crossover cables are connected directly to the MG 1000T Core 100BaseT Daughterboards for MG 1000T Expansion 3 and 4 Note 4 The required NTDUO609 crossover cables are contained in the NTDU19BA Cable Kit Figure 39 MG 1000T SLAN subnet cables Cable slot for NTDU0609 cables 5 to MG 1000T Expansion 3 and 4 100BaseT cable to MG 1000T 1 MG 1000T 2 MG 1000T 3 MG 1000T 4 i 9 Connect the MG 1000T Core ports shown in Figure 40 on page 160 to the data network switch using a CAT5 patch cable Note A customer supplied standard CAT5 cable is required Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 160 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Figure 40 MG 1000T Core connectors To Port 1 on daughterboard To Port 2 on daughterboard wll fio CEA CA NTDU14BA01 To MG 1000T 2 To MG 1000T 1 10 Connect RJ 45 1 on the MG 1000T Expansion shown in Figure 40 to the data network switch Figure 41 MG 1000T 100BaseT cable connection Cable from MG 1000T Core to MG 1000T Expansion Wi wa Tw 0 Soopo ar eu ee NTDU14BA01 End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 161 of 488 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet Follow Procedure 35 to connect an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet Procedure 35 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN
35. 11 0 101 System response PING 192 11 0 101 SUCCESSFUL c Enter the command PING 192 11 0 102 System response PING 192 11 0 102 SUCCESSFUL d Enter the command PING 192 11 0 103 System response PING 192 11 0 103 SUCCESSFUL e Enter the command PING 192 11 0 104 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 282 of 488 Verifying the network System response PING 192 11 0 104 SUCCESSFUL 9 Exit from LD 117 Enter the command RRKK End of Procedure Checking the status of the HSP ports Use LD 137 STAT HSP command to check the status of the HSP The following is a sample output of the STAT HSP command LD 137 Stat hsp HSP LINK CARRIER OK Auto Negotiation Enabled Auto Negotiation Completed YES Actual Line Speed 1000 Mbps Actual Duplex Mode Full Duplex LCS HSP STATE is UP Ethernet gei unit number 1 Internet address 127 2 0 2 Broadcast address 127 255 255 255 Ethernet address 00 c0 8b 07 a5 9f Netmask Oxff000000 Subnetmask Oxff000000 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Verifying the network Page 283 of 488 39698 packets received 80156 packets sent O input errors 0 output errors 0 collisions Checking the status of the MG 1000T 100BaseT links Follow Procedure 72 to check the status of the MG 1000T Core to MG 1000T Expansion 1 4 100BaseT links Procedure 72 Checking the status of MG 1000T Core to MG 1000T Expansion 1 4 100BaseT l
36. 111 TN 12 VGW Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153 111 TN 12 TN Description Customer ZONE Ada 01200000 o ooo Edit 01200001 o ooo Edit 01200002 o ooo Edit 01200003 o ooo Edit 01200004 o ooo Eait 01200005 o ooo Edit 01200006 0 ooo Edit 01200007 o ooo Edit 01200008 o ooo Edit 01200009 o ooo Edit 01200010 fy ooo Eart 01200011 o ooo Edit 01200012 o ooo Edit 01200013 o ooo Eait End of Procedure Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 The voice gateway channels are also called DSP channels or the card s physical TNs Follow Procedure 78 on page 328 to configure the voice gateway channels using LD 14 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 328 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Note The voice gateway channels can also be configured using Element Manager To configure the voice gateway channels using Element Manager follow Procedure 77 on page 325 Procedure 78 Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 Log in to the CS 1000E 1 Table 39 a Enter the command LOGI System response PASS Enter the default password 0000 Access LD 14 Enter the command LD 14 Enter responses shown in Table 39 LD 14 Configure physical TNs Part 1 of 2 REQ NEW 24 NEW 32 TYPE VGW TN Iscu DES aa a XTRK MC32 Create 24 voice Media Gateway channels on an ITG P Line card Not supp
37. 15 2 Ensure that all the digits of the DN are considered for call termination LDNO should be a number whose length is equal to the maximum length DN on the Node For example if DNs are five digits then LDNO could be configured as 55555 3 Establish a DID call End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 288 of 488 Verifying the network 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 289 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics JAMO ois sri at gol Pde aes Wades wee BAIL eoeedeecewe 289 Circuit card OPONSE o 0560s065 2204 h0 soo Rew RES EER EEE HREL ROS 293 Oreital Munk Cass oi che decieci deve libegisecai sees ess rE 293 COOMCCINE a MUR 2 c5 cede dee Eee eR Rew eRe eew we hs we Hews 294 Universal Trunk card connections 20 44c see0sve ese eeeeens 295 E amp M Trunk card Commiecnongc iccccrccreneeetineheae eeana ree 298 Trunk COME CHONSTEMIIE occcsccvehsneeetepinewtededeaces 300 Think sonnecions URK reenen errin trr ERER ERONEN TERRENT 310 Verifying trunk functionality 5 2 c444indenciew esaedasdeaedees 318 The work order outlines the placement of circuit cards in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander Analog trunks can be installed in both Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander However digital trunk cards can only be installed in slots 1 to 4 of the MG 1000T See Circuit Card
38. 264 Configuring a Terminal Server Follow Procedure 62 to connect a Terminal Server with a CS 1000E system Table 14 lists the MRV cables required to install the IR 3020M 101 Terminal Server in a CS 1000E system Table 14 Required MRV serial cables and connectors Order Code Description NTDU6302 Connects MRV Terminal Server to any standard DTE port or DCE port when a Null modem is used NTDU6303 Used for telnet rlogin connections P N 151 3028 Male RJ 45 to Male RJ 45 with connectors 10 feet P N 350 0308 Female RJ 45 to Female DB9 Customer made cables with the following pin out as NTDU6302 can also be used See Table 15 Table 15 Customer made cable pin out Pins on DB9 Female Pins on RJ45 Male MRV Terminal Server Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 256 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server Table 15 Customer made cable pin out Pins on DB9 Female Pins on RJ45 Male MRV Terminal Server RxD DSR DCD TxD GND RxD GND CTS RTS Procedure 62 Connecting a Terminal Server to the system 1 Connect the MRV P N 151 3028 serial cable from the Terminal Server console port 20 to the PC COM port WARNIN Port 20 is the default console port Do not change the configuration for port 20 2 Plug MRV PC Card in MRV package into Terminal Server faceplate socket and power on the Terminal Server 3 Start the MRV HyperTerminal application In Windows Start gt Programs g
39. 3001 311 for information about LD 10 Do not assign a Class of Service of LPA or MWA to an off premise telephone Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 390 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Procedure 100 Connecting an off premise telephone 1 Install the NTAK92BA Off Premise Protection Module on the wall using four 10 1 2 in minimum screws Connect a 6 AWG from the grounding lug at the bottom of the NTAK92AA Off Premise Protection Module to the system ground Refer to Figure 143 on page 391 DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK If connecting to a message waiting Line card unseat the card from its assigned slot before continuing with the next step Connect two NTAK9204 cables one from connector J1 and one from connector J2 from the protection module to the cross connect terminal Terminate the cables as shown in Figure 141 on page 387 Cross connect the J1 cable to the Tip and Ring connections coming from the Line card Cross connect the J2 cable to the off premise telephone Install the regulatory label provided with the Off Premise Protection Module on the inside right hand wall of the Media Gateway Install the Line card in its assigned position Activate the telephone 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Page 391 of 488 Figure 143 NTAK92BA Off Premise Protection Module connections
40. 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 65 of 488 e rack mounted to a 19 inch rack e provide configurable username for each port Table 8 MRV IR 8020M Terminal Server profile Property Description Product Code NTVWOOAB Height e 1U 1 U 1 3 4 inch or 4 4 cm Power e Power cord connector is located on the left hand corner on the unit s backplane Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable Unit is AC powered 120 V AV 1 58 amps Cooling Forced air cooling with side to side air flow The fans run at a single speed Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked Card slots None Connectors Twenty console ports for modular RJ 45 connectors One RJ 45 10BaseT network interface 19 inch rack All CS 1000E system components are mounted in a customer supplied 19 inch rack Ground the rack and equipment to the NTDU6201 Ground Bar System cables Table 9 on page 67 lists the cables required with the CS 1000E system Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 66 of 488 System components The base marketing package NTHU53AA provides an NTRC17 crossover cable to connect the LAN2 ports of the two core Call Servers It also contains two MRV Terminal Server cables NTDU6302 to connect from COM port 1 of both core Call Servers to the MRV Terminal Server Note Order the proper power cord for your region 553 3041 210 Standar
41. 389 Connecting an attendant CONnsOle 2504 55 053 60042ee0da seer pwar 391 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Contents Page 13 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones 395 Sr oe eee eee ee ee ee ee er er er ce ere 395 INGQUNCHOMN keea a R A R 396 Package components for the IP Phones 0 04 397 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones 408 Configuring virtual superloops 1 450 000 esse ees ep aewes arenes 410 Configuring an IP Phone using LD 11 411 Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer poas o ccsccs seg needs beni ee eke Ghdaaecananced 417 Installing IP Phone hardware components 420 Configuring the IP Phone boot parameters 4 424 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration 425 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters 428 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters 430 Using Set Based Installation 2 2sc 200nceds04eeeee05sonen5 433 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 ees ox dope eee eek ee eae dee ws 435 Verifying IP Phone functionality o s ss0 cccccee eesae een ev nein 439 Displaying registered IP Phones sc2cccccaece00n402 ceba2 en xe 439 LI peradine NOMNWAlS sco ad snk ee eee eee Rew eRIewe Cawae idee 439 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit 00000s 441 B I itcctten anther ee eme
42. Cross connect terminal block T R1 T2 R2 To off premise R telephones T4 NTAK92AA Hg Off Premise Protection Module T1 R1 T2 To analogue T line card in Graund lug i Option 11 u u i T4 cabinet R4 Connector J2 Connector J1 EN 25 NTAK9204 Cable NTAK9204 Cable 553 8351 EPS End of Procedure Connecting an attendant console Procedure 101 Connecting an attendant console 1 Locate the attendant console terminations at the cross connect terminal 2 Locate the Line card terminations at the cross connect terminal 3 With cross connect wire connect the Line card and other connections to the console as shown in Figure 144 on page 392 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 392 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Figure 144 Attendant console connections Cross connect Console block connector To ist TN To 2nd TN To 3rd TN To 15 AUX Console power W G 1 dot wire from AUX on AUX cable Cable to cable To 15 AUX M2250 one console G W 1 dot wire Console only on AUX cable Note As an alternative console L power can be obtained from the f D 4 th and 5 th TNs on the circuit card r 1 1 1 fo I I d 1 To 4th TN Tip I VPS I To 4th TN Ring l Note 2 VPS RTN 7 To 5th TN Tip Cable from To 5 th TN Ring console to Note 1 Relay 2 cross connect terminal Relay 1 Note 1 The M2250 is powered
43. ELAN subnet through a Layer 3 switch End of Procedure Dual Homed connection An MG 1000E can optionally be connected to a second BayStack 470 to provide a Dual Homed connection to the network so that the Media Gateway remains operational in the event of a failure of the first BayStack 470 used for the ELAN subnet connection Logical port 4 of the Dual Port IP daughterboard NTDK83 provides a connection to the second BayStack 470 providing an alternate connection to the network in the event of a failure of the primary BayStack 470 used for the logical port 2 connection Refer to Figure 32 for a sample configuration Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 110 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components Figure 32 Robust Data Network Topology Active Call Server Inactive Call Server Redundant Fibre Links m l ooa MG 1000E MG 1000E oora SE ie 7 MG 1000E HE sles 7 Port 2 Port 4 Signaling Server Signaling Server CEHE QoS l P i HEHEHEH Network After completing Procedure 14 on page 107 follow Procedure 15 on page 111 to connect an MG 1000E in the Dual Homed configuration 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 111 of 488 Proc
44. Enter choice gt lt y gt Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 132 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E Set Automatic Centralized Software Upgrade Mode to Please enter KCR gt gt lt 1 gt Sequential lt 2 gt Simultaneous Enter choice gt lt 1 gt 14 The system displays an Installation Status Summary report Enter lt CR gt to confirm and continue installation Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes start installation lt n gt No stop installation Return to the Main Menu You selected to install Software release 0450C on the new system This will create all necessary directories and pre allocate files on the hard disk You may continue with software install or quit mow and leave your software unchanged Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Continue with new system install lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 133 of 488 15 The PSDL files menu appears Enter the appropriate choice for the location of the site KKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKKKEKD SDL INSTALLATION MENU The PSDL contains the loadware for all downloadable cards in the system and loadware for M3900 series sets kkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkkkkxkkkkkxkxkxkkkkxkxkxkkkkkkkxk Select ONE of the SEVEN PSDL files
45. Enter the Server 1 IP node IP The IP Phone prompts S1 PORT 4100 Enter the Server 1 port The IP Phone prompts S1 ACTION 1 Enter the Server 1 action The IP Phone prompts S1 RETRY COUNT 10 Enter the Server 1 retry count The IP Phone prompts S2 Enter same information as for Server 1 The IP Phone prompts VLAN 0 No 1 Ma 2 Au 0 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 432 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones 11 12 13 Choose one of the following a Enter 0 to configure no VLAN The IP Phone displays Locating server After several seconds the IP Phone prompts Connect Svc Node x TN X X Go to step 12 b Enter 1 to configure manual VLAN The IP Phone prompts VLAN x Go to step 12 on page 432 c Enter 2 to configure automatic VLAN The IP Phone prompts VLAN x Go to step 12 Enter the VLAN ID The IP Phone displays Locating server If you did not configure an IP Phone Installer Password after several seconds the IP Phone prompts Node x TN XX Enter the node number and the IP Phone s virtual TN then go to step 16 If you configured an IP Phone Installer Password the IP Phone prompts Node x PassWord 0 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 433 of 488 14 Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator IP Phone Installer Password Note 1 An asterisk is displayed for e
46. Figure 141 NE 500 2500 type telephone cross connections Cable pairs Line Pack Lead ce Cross connect terminal W BL T To 500 2500 type BL W R telephone W O T To 500 2500 type ow R telephone W G T To 500 2500 type G W R telephone W BR T To 500 2500 type BR W R telephone W S T To 500 2500 type S W R telephone R BL T To 500 2500 type BL R R telephone R O T To 500 2500 type O R R telephone R G T To 500 2500 type G R R telephone R BR T To 500 2500 type BR R R telephone RS T To 500 2500 type S R R telephone BK BL T To 500 2500 type BL BK R telephone BK O T To 500 2500 type O BK R telephone BK G T To 500 2500 type G BK R telephone BK BR T To 500 2500 type BR BK R telephone BK S i To 500 2500 type S BK R telephone Y BL T To 500 2500 type BL Y R telephone 553 8349 EPS Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 387 of 488 Page 388 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Figure 142 Digital telephone cross connections Pack connector PE shelf Y BL BL Y Part of Telephone connecting block or connector Cross connect block Shelf Part of 25 25 pair cable connector pair cable Line cord to telephone For Power Supply leads to telephone to telephon
47. Gateway The MG 1000T link ports connect the MG 1000T Expansion to the MG 1000T Core Port 1 and Port 2 correspond with bulkhead connectors 1 and 2 shown in Figure 8 on page 56 The ELAN network interface connects the MG 1000T Core SSC to the ELAN subnet Port 2 is not used The Attachment Unit Interface AUI is used with earlier version SSC which require a Media Access Unit MAU The SDI connector in the Media Gateway provides an interface for a three port SDI cable The three port cable is used in an MG 1000T to break out into TTYO TTY1 and TTY2 For MG 1000E this cable is not used unless a maintenance access using TTYO is desired The DS 30X and CE MUX cables connect the Media Gateway to the Media Gateway Expander DIP switches DIP switches are available to set the ringing voltages ringing frequencies and message waiting voltages See Figure 8 on page 56 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 55 of 488 Figure 7 Connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Universal AC power Call Server to Media Gateway link cord connector Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 56 of 488 System components Figure 8 Front of the Media Gateway wi a settings I 3 aan mini 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Power status indicators Bulkhead I connectors System components Page 57 of 488 Media Gateway Expander
48. Gateways powered by the same electrical panel cssdecissivervenieserveteea nee 96 Procedure 9 Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels 2 6 iic sc ccs ewe ew vededs seen 98 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 18 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 10 Grounding a Media Gateway Expander Procedure 11 Grounding equipment in the UK 55 Procedure 12 Connecting co located Call Servers Procedure 13 Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers Procedure 14 Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG TODOE ccd Leah tienee dt eee tewat des ohn Procedure 15 Connecting an MG 1000E in the Dual Homed CONTIOUIGUION 6 s c 05 duis ee ieii Ge eee ndse ee ene me s Procedure 16 Connecting a Signaling Server tothe ELAN Procedure 17 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet Procedure 18 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card 000e cease Procedure 19 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet Procedure 20 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet Procedure 21 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway EXPANSION os iisciscdtestnnes eviews iiean ten tween 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 List of Procedures Page 19 of 488 Procedure 22 Installing the software on the Call Server 120 Procedure 23 Verifying the installation
49. IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters on page 430 Procedure 110 Using Set Based Installation on page 433 Procedure 111 Configuring the IP Softphone 2050 on page 436 Procedure 112 Installing the USB Headset Kit on page 437 Procedure 113 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC on page 437 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 408 of 488 Procedure 114 Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager on page 439 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones Follow Procedure 102 to configure the VoIP bandwidth management zones For more details on bandwidth management zones see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 VoIP bandwidth management zones can be configured with Element Manager or using the CLI For more information about Element Manager see Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 Procedure 102 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones using the CLI 1 Log in to the Call Server a Enter the command LOGI System response PASS b Enter the default password 0000 Access LD 117 Enter the command LD 117 Create a new zone with default parameters Enter the command NEW ZONE 0 Note LD 117 also includes DIS and ENL commands to disable or enable a zone When you create a zone its default state is enabled See Table 50 on page 409 for the LD 117 zone commands Print zone an
50. Installation and Configuration Page 68 of 488 System components Table 9 CS 1000E cables Part 2 of 3 Component Descriptions Cable Kits Expansion cable to connect the Media Gateway DS 30 and CE MUxX to the Media Gateway Expander Disposable wrist strap 100BaseT Cross Over Cable for connecting MG 1000Ts point to point 100BaseT Connection Signaling Servers Layer two switch BS 470 Carrier Cards ELAN on Gateways Cables amp Accessories Quantity NTDK95AA 2 A0783105 1 NTTK34AA 1 CAT5 Cables MRV Terminal Server RJ45 to 9 pin female RS232 25 feet long for connecting terminal equipment to the MRV Terminal Server Terminal server cable kit for interfacing with various NTDU6303 terminal ports that is Signaling Server Baystack or Gateway using BK48 cable MRV Terminal Server cable for connecting various Terminal Equipment to the Terminal Server 9 pin male to 9 pin female Null Modem adapter for use where connecting to DCE connections 25 to 9 pin male adapter to interface with NTBK48AA cable if desired Power cords NTVWO01iX NTDU6302 N0007485 N0007488 North American power Cord UK power cord Euro power cord 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 NTTK14AB NTTK18AB NTTK16AB System components Page 69 of 488 Table 9 CS 1000E cables Part 3 of 3 Cables amp Component Descriptions Cable Kits Accessories Quantity ANZ power cord NTTK15AA Swiss power cord NTTK
51. Manager web server Figure 3 Signaling Server a 2 E G z _ _ _ te a Table 2 Signaling Server profile Part 1 of 2 Property Description Order Code NTDU27 Height 1 U 1 U 1 3 4 inch or 4 4 cm Power Power status indicator green LED is located on the unit s faceplate Power cord connector is located on the left hand corner on the back of the unit Power On Off switch is on the faceplate Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable Unit is AC powered 100 240 VAC DC input is not supported Cooling Forced air cooling with front to back air flow The fan runs whenever the unit is on Card slots None 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 47 of 488 Table 2 Signaling Server profile Part 2 of 2 Property Description Connectors The DB 9 serial port the CD ROM and floppy front drives are located on the unit s faceplate The DB 9 serial port can support a login session for Command Line Interface CLI management See Figure 4 on page 48 Connectors The TLAN network interface P2 connects the rear unit to a TLAN network interface on a Layer 2 Switch The ELAN network interface P1 connects the unit to an ELAN network interface on a Layer 2 Switch The DB 9 serial port can support a login session for Command Line Interface CLI management There ar
52. Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Installation From Software Delivery Card 2 Utilities 3 Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Installation From Software DaughterBoard q uit hJelp or lt cr gt redisplay Select Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Installation from Software DaughterBoard from the menu Enter 3 System response Do you wish to do IP configuration y n a bort Configure the IP Enter y System response IP Configuration Menu 2 Using Manual Configuration 3 Keep Existing Configuration 4 Print Existing Configuration q uit p lrevious m ain menu h lelp or lt cr gt redisplay Enter Selection _ Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 238 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller 8 Configure the IP address for the CS 1000E to Media Gateway link network manually Enter 2 System response Enter Media Gateway New IP Parameters Media Gateway IP tox KEK Call Server IP a Ee RE Media Gateway NetMask PK Kiyo x Media Gateway Router FO KAO Is this correct y n a bort Note If the Media Gateway IP and the Call Server IP are on different subnets then the Media Gateway Router IP is prompted 9 Confirm the IP configuration If correct enter y System response Select M3900 Language Set Global 10 languages Western Europe 10 languages Eastern Europe 10 languages North America 6 languages Spare Group A 6 Spare
53. September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 75 of 488 component Consult the manufacturer s documentation for the weight of other components installed during the CS 1000E system installation Table 11 Weight of CS 1000E system components Component CS 1000E Call Server Signaling Server Media Gateway without cards with 4 cards Media Gateway Expander without cards with 4 cards BayStack 470 Switch BayStack 460 Power over Ethernet Switch MRV Terminal Server Guidelines for component placement in a rack When installing equipment the Layer two switches should be in a central location to allow for easy access of all LAN cabling The Media Gateways and Media Gateway Expanders must be mounted together vertically and they must be powered from the same power rail Typical vertical power bars in equipment racks are rated at 15 20 amps 120 volts Ensure that the equipment load does not exceed the power bar rating Refer to Communication Server 1000E Planning and Engineering 553 3041 120 for information on power consumption Do not place redundant equipment on the same electrical circuit There are no thermal concerns about equipment placement Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 76 of 488 Rack mounting the components Note 1 Leave wall space for the cross connect terminal Note 2 Position the rack so that you have access to both the front a
54. Servers are not connected to a ground bar They are properly grounded when e the CS 1000E power cord is plugged into the rack s AC outlet The rack s AC outlet must be grounded to its dedicated electrical panel This is the preferred method e the CS 1000E power cord is plugged into a wall AC outlet The CS 1000E is grounded outside of the rack using the safety grounding conductor in the power cord This method ensures proper grounding only of the CS 1000E itself It does not provide grounding protection for other rack mounted pieces of equipment Therefore ensure that other devices in the rack are properly grounded as required Grounding a Signaling Server The Signaling Server is not connected to a ground bar It is properly grounded when e the Signaling Server power cord is plugged into the rack s AC outlet The rack s AC outlet must be grounded to its dedicated electrical panel This is the preferred method Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 96 of 488 Installing system grounds the Signaling Server power cord is plugged into a wall AC outlet The Signaling Server is grounded outside of the rack using the safety grounding conductor in the power cord This method ensures proper grounding only of the Signaling Server itself It does not provide grounding protection for other rack mounted pieces of equipment Therefore ensure that other devices in the rack are properly grounded as required Gr
55. TTYs can be connected to the SDI ports Follow Procedure 69 on page 272 to connect devices to Media Gateways Refer to Table 18 for SDI port numbering for MG 1000T Core and MG 1000T Expansions Table 18 SDI port numbering for Media Gateways Media Gateway Normal mode Survival mode MG 1000T Core 0 1 2 N A MG 1000T Expansion 1 3 4 5 MG 1000T Expansion 2 6 7 8 MG 1000T Expansion 3 9 10 11 MG 1000T Expansion 4 12 13 14 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Page 271 of 488 Controlling the baud rate You can use a switch setting on the SSC s faceplate to control the baud rate for port 0 Use LD 17 to configure port 1 and port 2 Make sure the baud rate and device option settings are set correctly e Use Port 0 for software installation and upgrades Port 0 is the only system terminal SDJ port that you can use for software installation and upgrades e You can use all three ports on the SSC to connect terminals or modems e Use an NTBK48 3 port SDI cable with the SSC Table 19 shows the SDI port numbering Table 19 SDI port numbering Use Baud rate Data bits Stop bits MTC SCH BUG Set by a DIP switch MTC SCH BUG 1200 MTC SCH BUG 1200 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 272 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Procedure 69 Connecting SDI ports on the Media Gateways
56. an rlogin session This allows the ZMODEM transfer to complete See Table 16 for ZMODEM requirements Table 16 ZMODEM requirements Feature Setting Typeahead 1024 TCP window size 1024 telnet CSI ES Enabled telnet NEW LINE FILTER LF or Standard Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 262 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server 5 Enable autoconnect for the port Enter the commana DEFINE PORT xx AUTOCONNECT ENABLED Where xx port number 6 Enable autodedicate for the port Enter the command DEFINE PORT xx AUTODEDICATED ENABLED Where xx port number 7 Define a user name for the port Enter the command DEFINE PORT xx USERNAME ptyxx Where xx port number ptyxx User Name is the pty port set during Call Server configuration for rlogin connection The pty port is set using LD 17 For example in LD 17 configure TTY 2 as pty The port username on Terminal Server becomes pty2 not PTY2 or pty02 Note 1 Ignore the following MRV information message during using DEFINE command In Reach 729 Parameter cannot be modified by a set commana This is informational only that you must use DEFINE and not the more general SET command It is not an error Note 2 The quotation marks are also required around PTYxx 8 Log out of the port Enter the command LOGOUT PORT xx Where xx port number 553 3041 210 Standard 4
57. and configuring the Signaling Server software 10 Configure the application configuration for this Signaling Server See Figure 63 e Ifthe Set TPS Virtual Trunk TPS and optional Network Routing Service NRS applications are to be enabled on this Signaling Server enter a at the prompt to configure this Signaling Server as a co resident Signaling Server e If only the NRS is to be enabled on this Signaling Server Ifthis Signaling Server is to be associated with a Call Server enter a at the prompt to configure this Signaling Server as a co resident Signaling Server After you finished installing the Signaling Server software you can disable the Set TPS and Virtual Trunk TPS in Element Manager refer to Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 Ifthis Signaling Server is not to be associated with a Call Server enter b at the prompt to set this Signaling Server as a stand alone Signaling Server Figure 63 Application configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please select the application configuration for this Signaling Server Please enter lt a gt Co resident LTPS VTRK NRS lt b gt Stand alone NRS only no Call Server lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 187 of 488 11 Select the Network Routing Service NRS to be provided by this S
58. button to invoke a command 5 Select NodePwd from the Group drop down list 6 Select nodePwdShow from the Command drop down list 7 Click RUN The current node password information displays in the text area at the bottom of the web page 8 Enter the administrator IP Phone Installer Password in the Node Password box see Figure 146 9 Select nodePwdSet from the drop down list Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 419 of 488 10 Click SET The administrator password is set and enabled Figure 146 Node Password Node nodePwdSet gt SET Password Note The entered password appears as asterisks The valid characters are 0 9 The password can be null or 6 to 14 digits in length WARNING If the administrator password is null zero length then the Node ID TN and Password screens are not displayed on the IP Phones during their registration process This provides security as it prevents any entry of passwords or TNs on the IP Phones However it is impossible to install new IP Phones unless a temporary password is set 11 Select NodePwd from the Group drop down list 12 Select nodePwdShow from the Command drop down list 13 Click RUN The updated administrator IP Phone Installer Password is displayed in the text area at the bottom of the web page 14 Enter the temporary IP Phone Installer Password see F
59. component 4 Install a 6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug on the rear of the Media Gateway to the ground bar identified for that component s power source 5 Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire 6 Test the ground End of Procedure Grounding a Media Gateway Expander The Media Gateway Expander and the Media Gateway are considered as the same ground IMPORTANT Ground the Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway IMPORTANT Power each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander pair from the same electrical panel Follow Procedure 10 to ground a Media Gateway Expander Procedure 10 Grounding a Media Gateway Expander 1 Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing system grounds Page 99 of 488 2 Install a 6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug on the rear of the Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway See Figure 27 on page 97 Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire Test the ground End of Procedure Grounding other rack mounted components To ground multiple pieces of equipment in a rack use a separate ground connection from each piece of equipment to the ground bar If a piece of data communications equipment in a rack does not have a grounding lug then ground the rack to the ground bar When the rack is grounded to the ground bar the equipment is grounded using the Single Point Grounding method as shown in Figure 28
60. configure the virtual superloops For more details on virtual superloops see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Procedure 103 Configuring virtual superloops 1 Access LD 97 Enter the command LD 97 2 Enter responses shown in Table 51 Table 51 LD 97 Configure a Virtual Superloop Response Comment Change existing data Superloop V stands for a virtual superloop and xxx is the number of the virtual superloop xxx 0 252 in multiples of four for MG 1000E XXX 96 112 in multiples of four for MG 1000T See Table 52 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 411 of 488 Table 52 MG 1000T virtual superloop virtual card mapping 3 Exit from LD 97 Enter the command kkkk End of Procedure Configuring an IP Phone using LD 11 Follow Procedure 104 to configure an IP Phone The configuration can be completed using either OTM or CLI Procedure 104 Configuring the IP Phones 1 Access LD 11 Enter the command LD 11 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 412 of 488 2 Enter the appropriate responses shown in Table 53 Table 53 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 1 of 4 Response Description NEW CHG Add new or change existing data i2001 For IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 or i2002 IP Softphone 2050 CS 1000E acc
61. configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 339 of 488 Optionally you can connect a maintenance terminal to the maintenance port on the Voice Gateway Media Card to see the Voice Gateway Media Card s boot messages or to perform maintenance on it See Connecting CS 1000E system components on page 103 for more detail 1 Install the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card slot a Pull the top and bottom locking devices away from the card faceplate b Insert the Voice Gateway Media Card into the card guides and gently push it until it makes contact with the backplane connector c Hook the locking devices Note The Voice Gateway Media Card boots automatically If the Voice Gateway Media Card is a Follower then it retrieves the node configuration files from the IP telephony node Leader If it is a Leader then you must configure it See P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for a detailed configuration procedure 2 Observe the Voice Gateway Media Card faceplate display The red LED remains lit until the card is configured and enabled at which point it turns off When the card has finished booting the display is either FXxx or Lxxx where xxx is the number of telephones registered to the card indicating that the card is a Follower or Leader 3 If required you can now perform maintenance on the card using Element Manager or through the card s maintenance port if you connected a maintena
62. connector Card 1 End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 165 of 488 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN Follow Procedure 39 to connect a Media Card to the ELAN Procedure 39 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN 1 Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the ELAN network interface on the adaptor see Figure 45 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ 45 ELAN network interface on the BayStack 470 switch Figure 45 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on the Media Gateway End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 166 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet Follow Procedure 40 to connect a Media Card to the TLAN subnet Procedure 40 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 1 Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the TLAN network interface on the Adaptor see Figure 45 on page 165 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ 45 TLAN network interface on the BayStack 470 switch End of Procedure Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion Procedure 41 describes how to connect a Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway The Media Gateway Expander Cable Kit NTDK89 contains two NTDK95 cables used to connect the Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway One cable provides DS 30X connecti
63. database 139 Procedure 24 Reconfiguring I O ports and call registers 140 Procedure 25 Switching call processing to the Call Server 141 Procedure 26 Testing the Call Server 2 000eeeeeeees 141 Procedure 27 Installing the software on the second Call Server 141 Procedure 28 Making the system redundant 0 020068 142 Procedure 29 Testing Call Server Q 0 cece ee eee 147 Procedure 30 Switching call processing 200eeeeeeeeee 149 Procedure 31 Testing Call Server 1 ccsciississccicvceesceuwees 149 Procedure 32 Switching call processing 200eeeeeeeeee 151 Procedure 33 Performing a data dump to backup the customer database 000c cee eee eee 151 Procedure 34 Connecting the MG 1000T Core to an MG 1000T Expansion 0 0c eee eee eee 158 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 20 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 35 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet 161 Procedure 36 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet 162 Procedure 37 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 163 Procedure 38 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card 0000e ee eeee 164 Procedure 39 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN 165 Procedure 40 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 166 Procedure 41 Connecting a Medi
64. dered hentewle eee es 172 Logging in to the Signaling Server 0 0 0 erenn 195 Verifying a successful configuration 2 0s0c4s4ee00 nus ees 197 Testing the Leader Signaling S rver ic css cect ecasceanreeaoen 197 This chapter describes the Signaling Server Install Tool and explains how to install Signaling Server software and perform basic configuration Signaling Server Software Install Tool The Signaling Server Software Install Tool runs from the Signaling Server Software CD ROM Use this tool to install Signaling Server software Note The Signaling Server is out of service during software installation or upgrade Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 170 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software To perform a software installation or upgrade reboot the Signaling Server with the Software CD ROM in its drive No floppy disk is required since the Software CD ROM is bootable The Install Tool installs all Signaling Server software including the operating system applications and web files The Install Tool also copies software files for the Voice Gateway Media Cards and IP Phones which are used to upgrade these components For a new installation the Install Tool prompts for IP Telephony parameters to perform basic system configuration After installing the Signaling Server software and configuring basic information about the Signaling Server the Signaling Serve
65. external alarm froma PFTU Page 459 of 488 Table 62 PFTU connections Part 2 of 3 Normal mode Failure mode Makes with 10T and Opens 10T and 10R 10R Makes with 11T and 11R Makes with 9T and 9R Open Makes with 12T and Opens 12T and 12R 12R Makes with 9T and 9R Makes with 11T and Open 11R Makes with 14T and Opens 14T and 14R 14R Makes with 15T and 15R Makes with 13T and Open 13R Makes with 16T and Opens 16T and 16R 16R Makes with 13T and 13R Makes with 15T and Open 15R Makes with 18T and Opens 18T and 18R 18R Makes with 19T and 19R Makes with 17T and Open 17R Makes with 20T and Opens 20T and 20R 20R Makes with 17T and 17R Makes with 19T and Open 19R Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 460 of 488 Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU Table 62 PFTU connections Part 3 of 3 Normal mode Makes with 22T and 22R Failure mode Opens 22T and 22R Makes with 23T and 23R Makes with 21T and 21R Open Makes with 24T and 24R Opens 24T and 24R Makes with 21T and 21R Makes with 23T and 23R 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Open Page 461 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INCU nto tacce iene gare ET TST ESTEE TETT TENT 461 MG
66. gt at the Install Tool Menu 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 121 of 488 The system attempts to validate and format the FMD partitions The following format occurs only if the on board 1 GByte FMD is blank gt Obtaining and checking system configuration gt Validate hard disk partitions Validate number of hard drive partitions and size Number of partitions 0 Disk check failed three partitions expected INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition Ju errNo 0xd0001 Please press lt CR gt when ready INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition n p Please press lt CR gt when ready INST0010 Unable to validate Hard disk partition e Please press lt CR gt when ready Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 122 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E The Fix Media Device on Core 0 is blank Install cannot continue unless the FMD is partitioned Note INSTALL WILL REBOOT AFTER THIS PROCEDURE AND PARTITION IT INSTALL REMOVABLE MEDIA MUST B FIX MEDIA WILL BE EMPTY AFTER YOU Gl IN THE DRIVE AT THIS TIMI Gl Please enter KCR gt gt lt a gt Partition the Fix Media Device Enter choice gt gt Repartitioning Fix Media Device fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x8000 Low boundary 0 High b
67. introduced in LD 137 e STAT FMD display text Status of both Fixed Media Devices FMD command parameter none 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 147 of 488 e STAT FMD display text Status of the specified Fixed Media Device command parameter core with values of 0 or 1 e STAT RMD display text Status of both Removable Media Devices RMD command parameter none e STAT RMD display text Status of the specified Removable Media Device command parameter core with values of 0 or 1 At this point it is possible to customize the HSP IP addresses on the HSP ports To do this change the HSP addresses on the active side and the addresses are automatically invoked on the inactive side For more information see Communication Server 1000 System Redundancy 553 3001 307 Testing the Call Servers Procedure 29 Testing Call Server 0 At this point in the installation Call Server 0 is tested from active Call Server 1 Upon successful completion of these tests call processing is switched and the same tests are performed on Call Server 1 from active Call Server 0 As a final step call processing is then switched again to Call Server 1 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 148 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E From active Call Server 1 perform the following tests on Call Server 0 1 Perform a redundancy sanity test LD 135 ST
68. lt a gt RMD is now in the drive lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 127 of 488 At this point either replace the RMD or quit the installation If you select option lt q gt Quit the system requires confirmation Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool You selected to quit Please confirm Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes quit lt n gt No DON T quit Enter choice gt If lt y gt Yes quit is selected the system prints INST0127 Keycode file is corrupted Check Keycode file and returns to the installation main menu After accessing the RMD containing the valid keycode press lt CR gt The system displays the keycode file available as in the following example The following keycode files are available on the removable media Name Size Date Time K1 gt kexxxx 1114 Mar 29 2005 15 46 K2 gt kc35f kcd 1114 Mar 01 2005 15 33 K3 gt kcbuffy450c kcd 1114 Mar 31 2005 10 18 lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt 3 Note A maximum of 20 keycode files can be stored under the keycode directory on the RMD The keycode files must have the same extension kcd Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 128 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 7 Select the keycode to be used
69. on page 100 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 100 of 488 Installing system grounds Figure 28 Grounding multiple pieces of equipment in a rack Terminal Server a ea Signaling Server ui s CS 1000E Call Server Media Gateway Chassis x Grounding lug on Media Gateway back of chassis Chassis Expansion communications equipment with grounding lug Rack grounding lock oe _A lt NTBK80 or NTDU6201 Ground Bar 553 CSE9027C 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing system grounds Page 101 of 488 Grounding equipment in the UK Follow Procedure 11 to ground equipment in the UK Procedure 11 Grounding equipment in the UK 1 Connect a protective and functional ground wire from the grounding strip on the Krone Test Jack Frame to the ground at the building entry point Use a green yellow wire no thinner than 10 mm Consider each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander pair as one ground 2 Jumper the Media Gateway Expander ground to the Media Gateway ground See Figure 27 on page 97 3 In each Media Gateway a Connect a ground wire from the ground lug in the equipment to the ground connection at the Test Jack Frame Use a green yellow wire no thinner than 10 mm b Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the grounding wire c Measure the resistance of the ground between the Krone Test Jack Frame and the Media Gateway frame ground The resistance mu
70. on the system The system validates the selected keycode and displays the software release and machine type authorized Validating keycode Copying cf2 keycode KCport60430m kcd to u keycode Copy OK 1114 bytes copied The provided keycode authorizes the install of xxxx software all subissues for machine type XXXX CPP4 processor on xXXX Note The software release displayed depends on the keycode file content 8 The system requests keycode validation Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool Please confirm that this keycode matches the System S W on the RMD Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes the keycode matches Go on to Install Menu lt n gt No the keycode does not match Try another keycode Enter choice gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 129 of 488 If the keycode matches enter lt CR gt to continue the installation The system displays the Install Menu IBOOTROM RM Communication Server 1000 Software Database D Install Tool INSTALL M E Software KCR gt gt lt a gt lt b gt CP BOOTROM lt c gt lt d gt lt t gt lt k gt lt p gt lt q gt Enter The Software Installation Tool will install or installation Succession Database and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughou
71. parameters specifically e The screen for the Follower Signaling Server displays only the value for the Hostname parameter all other values are blank e The screen for the stand alone Signaling Server displays values for the Hostname ELAN network interface TLAN network interface and NRS parameters The Node ID field is set to 0 The Call Server IP field is set to 0 0 0 0 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 193 of 488 Figure 73 IP Telephony parameter configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx You have entered the following parameters for this Leader Signaling Server Node ID 276 Hostname SS_Node276_Ldr ELAN IP 192 168 20 100 AN subnet mask 255 255 255 0 AN gateway IP 192 168 10 1 LAN IP 192 168 20 20 LAN subnet mask 255 255 255 0 LAN gateway IP 192 168 20 1 Node IP 192 168 20 100 Call Server IP 192 168 10 10 NRS configuration Alternate GK SIP Primary NRS IP 192 168 20 10 Alternate NRS IP 192 168 20 24 Please enter lt y gt Yes these parameters are correct lt n gt No these parameters are not correct Enter Choice gt The system echoes the ELAN network interface MAC address For future reference the ELAN MAC address is x00 02 p3 c5 51366 This address is on the face of the Signaling Server on the right side when the bezel door is
72. subnet 1 Connect one end of a standard CAT5 cable to the 10 100BaseT ELAN network interface on the back of the MG 1000T Core as shown in Figure 42 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 cable to an RJ 45 ELAN network interface on the ELAN Layer 2 switch BayStack 470 24T Figure 42 10 100 BaseT connectors End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 162 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet Follow Procedure 36 to connect a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet Procedure 36 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet 1 Connect one end of a standard CAT5 cable to the ELAN network interface bottom on the back of the Signaling Server as shown in Figure 43 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 cable to an RJ 45 ELAN network interface on the ELAN Layer 2 switch BayStack 470 24T Figure 43 Signaling Server ELAN and TLAN network interfaces TLAN ELAN End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 163 of 488 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet Follow Procedure 37 to connect a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet Procedure 37 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 1 Connect a standard CAT5 cable to the TLAN network interface connector top RJ 45 jack on the back of the Signaling Server see Figure 43 on p
73. telephony node on page 365 The IP Phones require local boot parameter configuration see Configuring the IP Phone boot parameters on page 424 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 397 of 488 Package components for the IP Phones Table 44 lists the IP Phone 2001 package components and product codes Table 44 IP Phone 2001 components list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2001 package contents include e IP Phone 2001 e Handset e Handset cord e Footstand e 7 ft Cat5 Ethernet cable e Getting Started card VAC 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and Uk IP Phone 2001 Ethergray with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA16 A0533387 IP Phone 2001 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU90BA16 A0533388 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU90AA70 A0053389 IP Phone 2001 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU90BA70 A0533390 Replacement parts 7 ft Cats Ethernet Cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 Handset Charcoal A0758634 Handset cord Ethergray for IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2001 A088682 Handset cord Charcoal for IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2001 N0000764 IP Phone 2001 2002 2004 Power Adapters Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North America A0619627 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W 240 A0656598 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration
74. the Call Servers 42 cc 20c8desep tees neseee ARTERE EOR 147 The Software Install Kit required to install CP PIV includes one CF card for system software and one for backup The system CF card contains the following e CS 1000E Release 4 5 software e keycode files e CS 1000E Release 4 5 Dependency List PEPs for Large and Small systems e default database if initiated during the installation A third CF card is blank and can be used for database backup storage Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 120 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E IMPORTANT Systems and components delivered to customer sites may include preinstalled software However the pre installed software versions are typically older and are included only for manufacturing and order management purposes Do not attempt to operate the system with the pre installed software You must download the latest software from the Nortel Software Download web site and install the software as part of the installation process Installing the software This section provides the steps involved in installing CS 1000 Release 4 5 for the CP PIV Procedure 22 Installing the software on the Call Server 1 2 3 Check that a terminal is connected to COM1 on the Call Server Insert the RMD into the CF card slot Press the manual RESET button on the CP PIV card faceplate in the Call Server EPE blocking message is possible Enter lt CR
75. the network using the Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager Log in to the Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager a b Verify that the Gatekeeper is the Primary Gatekeeper and is active c Configure the System Wide Settings d Create the CDP domains e Add the RAS and non RAS endpoints f Add the endpoint prefixes g Add the Numbering Plan entries for each endpoint including the Cost Factor for each entry h Add the default routes i Add the Gatekeeper zones if required j Test the Numbering Plans k Perform database cutover l Perform the following operations as necessary i Take the Gatekeeper out of service ii Perform database cutover iii Perform database rollback iv View traffic reports m Log out of the Gatekeeper web pages in Element Manager Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 488 of 488 Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specifi
76. upon network parameter limitations specified in Communication Server 1000 System Redundancy 553 3001 307 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 105 of 488 To separate the redundant Call Servers the ELAN subnet and the subnet of the High Speed Pipe HSP can be extended between the two processors with an Ethernet switch using Layer 2 protocol If the two Call Servers are collocated they can be connected using a standard CATS5e or CAT6 crossover cable limited to 100 meters in length For detailed information on Campus Redundancy refer to Communication Server 1000 System Redundancy 553 3001 307 The Layer 2 switch allows the ELAN subnet and the subnet of the High Speed Pipe HSP to be extended between the two processors The BayStack 470 24T provides full duplex wire speed 100BaseT with no significant packet loss less than 0 001 and delays of less than 100 usec The method used to connect Call Server 0 to Call Server 1 depends on the proximity of the units If the units are co located follow Procedure 12 to connect the Call Servers If the units are configured for Campus Redundancy follow Procedure 13 to connect the Call Servers Connecting co located Call Servers Follow Procedure 12 to connect co located Call Servers Procedure 12 Connecting co located Call Servers 1 Plug one end of the CAT5E RJ 45 crossover cable NTRC17 into the LAN 2 connector on the front of Cal
77. wall mount kit Charcoal used with Ethergray and NTMN15BA70 Charcoal models A0503076 Replacement parts 7 ft Ethernet Cat5 cable A0648375 Handset Ethergray A0788874 Handset Charcoal A0758634 Handset cord Ethergray A0788682 Handset cord Charcoal N0000764 Footstand Charcoal used for Ethergray and Charcoal models A0538587 IP Phone 2004 Power Adaptors Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North America A0619627 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W 240 VAC A0656598 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and Uk Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 230 VAC 50 60 A0619635 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in AC to AC 8W A0647042 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC 50 Hz to A0828858 16 VAC at 500 mA Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 401 of 488 Table 47 lists the IP Phone 2007 package components and product codes Table 47 IP Phone 2007 component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2007 package contents includes e IP Phone 2007 charcoal with metallic bezel e Handset e Handset cord e Footstand e 7 ft 2 3 m CAT5 Ethernet cable e Getting Started card NTDU96AB70 Replacement parts 7 ft CAT5 Ethernet cable A0648375 Handset charcoal A0758634
78. 00T Core must go to MG 1000T Expansion 1 Port 2 to MG 1000T Expansion 2 and so on 3 Connect the 100BaseT RJ 45 connector 1 on the back of the Media Gateway to the identical connector on the first Survivable MG 1000T Expansion shown in Figure 40 on page 160 Use the supplied NTTK34AA two meter UTP CAT5 RJ 45 cross over cable to connect the MG 1000T Core and the Survivable MG 1000T Expansion 4 Connect port 1 of the MG 1000T Expansion 100BaseT daughterboard 2 to the bulkhead connector 1 as shown in Figure 39 on page 159 5 For MG 1000T Expansion 2 connect port 2 of the MG 1000T Core 100BaseT daughterboard 1 to the bulkhead connector 2 shown in Figure 39 on page 159 6 Connect the 100BaseT RJ 45 connector 2 on the back of the Media Gateway to the 100BaseT RJ 45 connector 1 on the second MG 1000T Expansion shown in Figure 40 on page 160 7 Connect port 1 of the MG 1000T Expansion 100BaseT daughterboard 2 to the bulkhead connector 1 as shown in Figure 39 on page 159 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 159 of 488 8 MG 1000T Expansion 3 and 4 network cables NTDU0609 must be routed from the 100 BaseT daughterboard through the cable slot on the side of the MG 1000T Core with one ferrite on the inside of the Media Gateway and the second ferrite external to the Media Gateway as shown in Figure 39 on page 159 Connect to MG 1000T Expansion 3 and 4 using the 100BaseT RJ 45 connector
79. 03 252 1 04 252 1 07 252 1 08 252 1 09 252 1 10 Vote Ihe bottom most card slot in the Media Gateway is reserved for the Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 338 of 488 Table 41 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Table 41 shows the slot assignments for the MG 1000T Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion MG 1000T Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignments Media Gateway Media Gateway Expansion Media Gateway Media Gateway Media Gateway Media Gateway Media Gateway 0 3 4 Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logical card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot Media 1 1 1 11 1 21 1 31 1 41 Gateway 2 2 2 12 2 22 2 32 2 42 3 3 3 13 3 23 3 33 3 43 4 4 4 14 4 24 4 34 4 44 5 5 i 5 5 se 5 6 6 6 6 6 Media 7 7 7 17 7 27 7 37 7 47 Gateway Expansion 8 8 8 18 8 28 8 38 8 48 9 9 9 19 9 29 9 39 9 49 10 10 10 20 10 30 10 40 10 50 Note The bottom most card slot in the Media Gateway is reserved for the SSC card Procedure 80 Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot The ELAN subnet and TLAN subnet should already be connected on the back of the Media Gateway If not refer back to Connecting CS 1000E system components on page 103 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and
80. 07 020 1 08 020 1 09 020 1 10 024 0 01 024 0 02 024 0 03 024 0 04 024 0 07 024 0 08 024 0 09 0240 10 024 1 01 024 1 02 024 1 03 024 1 04 024 1 07 024 1 08 024 1 09 024 1 10 252 0 01 252 0 02 252 0 03 252 0 04 252 0 07 252 0 08 252 0 09 252 0 10 252 1 01 252 1 02 252 1 03 252 1 04 252 1 07 252 1 08 252 1 09 252 1 10 Note The bottom most card slot in the Media Gateway is reserved for the card Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 484 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 485 of 488 Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database Contents This section contains information on the following topics IGRCIWENON occ Gees ranee E EERE REEE 485 Implementation sumMMALY 052 cccisey eeaw Reser eeneeweoees 485 Introduction This chapter provides an outline for configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database Use the IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 NTP to configure IP Peer Networking and for instructions about managing the Gatekeeper database Implementation summary Note This section is intended as a summary of how to implement IP Peer Networking and how to manage the Gatekeeper database Many of these steps can be performed out of sequence Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 486 of 488 Con
81. 0E zone number Ix Second MG 1000E Virtual conference circuit starting loop number Two consecutive VXCTs are assigned The VXCTs must be previously configured in LD 17 Where 0 252 x 0 means 1 TDS loop only x 1 means 1 TDS loop and 1 conference loop x 2 means 2 TDS loops and 2 conference loops x 3 means 2 TDS loops and 3 conference loops x 4 means 2 TDS loops and 4 conference loops Precede with X to remove Configuring Digitone Receivers Digitone Receivers must be configured in each MG 1000E if any analog terminals or trunks are equipped The loop of the Digitone Receivers is the 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 215 of 488 superloop of the MG 1000E The first MG 1000E in the superloop is on shelf 0 and the second MG 1000E s on shelf 1 Sixteen units of DTMF tone detection DTR are integrated within the controller SSC circuitry or eight Digitone Receiver units can be configured on each of card 14 and card 15 These Digitone Receiver units are built in on the SSC card in the MG 1000E No additional hardware is required If Digitone Receivers units are configured in any other card slots a receiver hardware pack must be equipped in the slot If no hardware is equipped the unequipped receiver units may be allocated during call processing resulting in call failure Any additional tone signaling resources must be added and configured as IPE car
82. 1 Connect the NTBK48 3 port SDI cable to the 9 pin SDI port RS 232 at the rear of the Media Gateways see Figure 88 Figure 88 SDI port access to the Media Gateway SSC card NORTEL NTOUIA wtiwores Se 2 Connect the system terminal to the cable marked port 0 on the NTBK48 3 port cable You require a Modem Eliminator adapter to connect the system to a TTY terminal This adapter is included in the CS 1000E and the Media Gateway cable kits 3 Ifthe system is accessed remotely connect the system modem to the cable marked port 1 on the NTBK48 cable 4 When instructed connect the modem to an outside line 5 When instructed test the modem for correct operation when the system is operating Note You can use the remaining ports for other equipment such as CDR devices or TTYs End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Page 273 of 488 Signaling Server SDI connection The Signaling Server has two maintenance ports the Front port and the Console port see Figure 89 The Console port must be used to install the Signaling Server software to perform the basic configuration Figure 89 Signaling Server maintenance port locations Procedure 70 Connecting the maintenance PC to a Signaling Server 1 Connect a DTE DTE null modem serial cable supplied with the Signaling Server from the Console port to a PC workstation
83. 1000T switch over to Survival Mode 0 462 Switchback from Survival Mode ca6 iccecec4e ebheekadeieas 464 LOCK and UNLOCK commands c0sic0rcadeviee eared edeas 465 Database synchroniZauion 4 3506s0c0s4a5 eewn es ee roert kit rik 466 Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion 472 Printing Survivable MG 1000T Expansion parameters 473 Configuring Alternate primary controller 473 Verifying IP telephony node operation in Survival Mode 475 Retrieving CDR records from a survivable MG 1000T Expansion 476 This chapter provides procedures for configuring an alternate primary controller and survivability on an MG 1000T This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 119 Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion on page 472 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 462 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller e Procedure 120 Configuring the IP telephony node for Alternate primary controller on page 473 e Procedure 121 Verifying the operation of a Voice Gateway Media Card in an MG 1000T expansion in Survivable Mode on page 475 e Procedure 122 Retrieving CDR files using XModem on page 476 MG 1000T switch over to Survival Mode If survivability is configured on an MG 1000T the following scenarios can trigger a switchover to Survival Mode e Automatic Switchover
84. 100BaseT daughterboard dual port to an SSC CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Static electricity can damage circuit cards Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit cards or any of their components 1 Unpack the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port and the NTDU0606 cable 2 Using the two NTDU0606 CAT5 Ethernet cables provided Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 228 of 488 Configuring a Small System Controller a Attach the appropriate port number label 2 or 4 to the respective cable b Install these cables firmly into the RJ 45 ports on the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port 2 Completely insert each cable See Figure 82 on page 230 and Figure 83 on page 231 CAUTION Service Interruption The RJ 45 connectors located on the top of the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port are for Media Gateways 1 and 3 The RJ 45 connectors located on the bottom of the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port are for Media Gateways 2 and 4 3 Insert the red black yellow LED cable on the SSC into the LED connector on the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port See Figure 81 on page 228 This connection provides the link status display on the front cover Figure 81 100Baset daughterboard dual port LED cable connector 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a Small System Controller Page 229 of 488 Install the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port in slot 2 of the SSC Locat
85. 16R 16 BL Y 17T 42 Y O 17R 17 O Y 18T 43 Y G 18R 18 G Y 19T 44 Y BR 19R 19 BR Y 20T 45 Y S 20R 20 S Y 21T 46 V BL 21R 21 BL V 3 22T 47 V O 22R 22 O V 23T 48 V G 23R 23 G V 24T 49 V BR 24R 24 BR V 25T 50 V S 25R 25 S V 553 CSE0019 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 358 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Procedure 90 describes how to install the Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK For detailed information refer to the Krone documentation Procedure 90 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK 1 Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross connect terminal 2 Lay out the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 124 on page 359 3 Attach labels on the cross connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following Analog Line cards DC15 AC15 RAN PAG cards Data Access cards AUX wiring Power Fail Transfer Units Digital Line cards Telephones Exchange Line Trunk cards Direct Dialing Inward trunk cards Miscellaneous equipment 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Page 359 of 488 Figure 124 Typical Krone cross connect terminal layout UK Pair Pair A Sar LL 17 C N 24 9ftr i mode 1 A naon TET 8 Other 1 O auxcable OOO 6 equipment OET Grounding block WEA 17 CT A 24 C N 16 1 1 Media Gateway Expansion 1 1 1 1 Media Gateway 7 9 1 7 9 1 7
86. 17AB Denmark power cord NTTK22AB Miscellaneous system components Table 10 contains a list of miscellaneous items that can be used with the CS 1000E system installation Table 10 Miscellaneous components Order Code Description Purpose QUA6A Power Failure Transfer To transfer trunk lines during a power failure Unit NTBK80BA Ground bar Ground Bar Option 11C for same room AC Cabinets 1 per system and 2 or more cabinets NTDU6201 Ground bar Ground Bar LRE Large NT6D5304 Ground bar Ground Bar LRE Small NTAK92BA External Protection Protects up to four off premises analog Device 500 2500 type telephones NT1R20BA Extended Line card Connects up to eight off premises analog Off Premises 500 2500 type telephones Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 70 of 488 System components Uninterruptible Power Supply Use an Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS to provide a backup power supply for CS 1000E Core Call Server 0 and Core Call Server 1 Media Gateway Media Gateway Expander Signaling Server MRV Terminal Server BayStack 470 24T BayStack 470 48T BayStack 460 with Power over LAN A UPS provides a continuous AC power supply Refer to Communication Server LOOOE Planning and Engineering 553 3041 120 for calculating power consumption requirements Install the UPS unit according to the manufacturer s instructions 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 200
87. 255 0 define server ip primary gateway address 172 16 3 1 End of Procedure Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port Connect the Terminal Server ethernet port to the ELAN using a CATS ethernet cable The virtual management port 0 is accessible from an online PC using a telnet session The Terminal Server can now be configured from the on line PC Procedure 64 Run telnet from PC 1 Use Start gt Run Input telnet command telnet ip address port Where ip address Terminal Server IP address Port The target port number on Terminal Server 2000 xx x 100 For Terminal Server virtual management port xx 0 Example telnet 172 16 3 50 2000 2 Press lt CR gt until the MRV login prompt appears 3 Input login password and username to log in to the virtual management port The default password is access End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server Page 259 of 488 Telnet CS 1000E COM port from a PC Connect port xx xx 1 19 of the Terminal Server to COM1 port of the CS 1000E Call Server Follow Procedure 65 to establish access to a Call Server from a PC through telnet Terminal Server Use the same port number for each procedure step Procedure 65 Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet Terminal Server 1 Disable IP TCP Keepalive Timer so that the telnet session is always on and LAN traffic is reduced Enter D EFINE PORT xx IP TCP K REPALIVE
88. 3 Refer to Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 for details about this command Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 366 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node The preconfigured IP telephony configuration files from the leader Signaling Server must be imported These files are saved on the CS 1000E as e c u db node nodex cfg where x is the node number e c u db node nodex btp where x is the node number IMPORTANT Do not attempt to alter the configuration files either manually or with OTM s ITG or IP Phone management Use Element Manager only This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 92 Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer on page 367 e Procedure 93 Logging in to Element Manager on page 370 e Procedure 94 Importing an existing node on page 372 e Procedure 95 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration on page 374 e Procedure 96 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in Element Manager on page 379 e Procedure 97 Performing a datadump using Element Manager on page 380 Before you begin Perform a datadump Use Element Manager to perform a datadump before making any changes to the IP telephony node A datadump backs up both the IP telephony node configuration files and the customer database files The datadump procedure using Element Manager is outlined in Procedure 97 on page 380 Enab
89. 3 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 M1 M2 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 305 of 488 Table 26 E amp M TIE Trunk card Part 2 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Column 1 Column 2 Card 10 from equipment Type 2 Type 2 14T BK BR 39 TA 14R BR BK 14 TB 15T BK S 40 E1 15R S BK 15 E2 16T Y BL 41 M1 SIG3A 16R BL Y 16 M2 SIG3B Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair Table 27 E amp M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections Part 1 of 2 Lead designations Pair color Unit number TA W BL TB BL W RA W O RB O W TA W S TB S W RA R BL RB BL R Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 306 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 27 E amp M 2280 Hz TIE Trunk connections Part 2 of 2 Table 28 E amp M 2 wire Recorded Announcement Trunk connections Lead designations Pair color Unit number 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 307 of 488 Table 29 E amp M 2 wire Music Trunk connections Lead designations Pair color Unit number Table 30 Central Office amp Direct Dial Inward Trunk connections Part 1 of 2 Cable from equipment Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Lead designations
90. 470 NTDU27 Signaling Server NT4N64AA CPPII A0852632 Media Card L adapter A0870611 MIRAN L adapter P0609204 Media Card L adapter P0609205 MIRAN L adapter NTDU14 Gateway Communication Server 1000E 9 pin DCE male 9 pin DCE male 9 pin DTE male Note Signaling Server comes with a six foot female to female null modem cable 9 pin DTE male 9 pin DCE female 9 pin DCE female 9 pin DTE male 9 pin DTE male 9 pin DTE male modified to isolate pins 6 7 and 8 Use PORT 0 of NTBK48AA 3 port SDI cable Installation and Configuration Page 266 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 267 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics Modin nck oni eh ERR ARE aeRO RHEE esedbebad 267 seme the TTY terminal PO csi cen ebesenieeenieieareveayees 268 Traditional terminal SD Connection s 0006200084 coun eeee eee es 268 CS 1000E Core Call Server SDI connection 269 MG TOQUE SD connection ach ieeuds beh baoedevoavevanires 270 MG 1000T SDI SontectiOn as ccs taccsuneesedgeeeewiaeaseves 270 Signaling Server SDI connection 0 00 eee eee eee eee 273 BayStack 470 SDI connectors eraristir enie aniio 274 Media Card SDI Connection oc icsaccxee se kaane kA AEA 274 In the CS 1000E system each stand alone module Call Server MG 1000E MG 1000T Signaling
91. 5 for a detailed configuration procedure Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager The voice gateway channels are also called DSP channels or the card s physical TNs Follow Procedure 77 to configure the voice gateway channels using Element Manager Note The voice gateway channels can also be configured using LD 14 To configure the voice gateway channels using LD 14 follow Procedure 78 on page 328 Procedure 77 Adding voice gateway channels using Element Manager 1 Select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Configuration from the navigator The Node Configuration web page opens as shown in Figure 99 on page 322 2 Click the next to the desired node to expand it Click VGW Channels next to the desired card If no VGW channels are configured yet an alert box is displays Click OK to close the alert box Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 326 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card The VGW channels configuration for this card opens as shown in Figure 102 Figure 102 VGW Channel web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Contiquration VGV Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153 111 TN 12 VGW Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153 111 TN 12 TN Description Customer ZONE 4 Click Add The Add VGW channels web page opens as shown in Figure 103 Figure 103 Add VGW cha
92. 5 minus 1 D the character D When the character D is entered the system searches the DN keys from key 0 and up to find a DN key with CLID table entry The CLID associated with the found DN key will then be used Note The position of the cccc or D field varies depending on the key name or function You may enter a CLID table entry if aaa ACD HOT d HOT L MCN MCR PVN PVR SCN or SCR Type xx NUL to remove a key function or feature Some data ports require specific key assignments Refer to the Meridian Data Services NTPs for information regarding these requirements Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 414 of 488 Table 53 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 3 of 4 Response Description Key number limits that can be assigned are as follows 0 7 for Meridian Communications Adapter MCA 0 5 for M2006 0 7 for M2008 0 59 for M2616 varies with number of add on modules 0 79 for 12002 varies with value of KEM 0 79 for 12004 varies with value of KEM Note The first IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 32 55 and the second IP Phone KEM is assigned keys 56 79 Type xx NUL to remove a key function or feature for i2002 and i2004 If either the Meridian Programmable Data Adapter MPDA or the Display Module is equipped then key 7 on sets M2008 M2216 and M2616 sets and key 5 on set M2006 will become Program keys which cannot be us
93. 7 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 377 of 488 Figure 136 Transfer Progress Complete Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Edit Transfer Progress Transfer Progress 207 179 153 100 Complete ne 207 179 153 109 Complete Vv Vv 207 179 153 111 Complete Vv Vv Microsoft Internet Explorer xj AN Transfer succesful to all elements in the node 5 Click OK in the dialog box The Transfer Status web page displays Note The Transfer Status web page see Figure 137 can also be displayed from the Node Summary web page by clicking Transfer Status This web page indicates if the transfer was successful or not For example Figure 137 shows some elements as unreachable you can transfer to these elements again Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 378 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Figure 137 Transfer Status web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Transfer Status Transfer Status SelectAll Unselectall Transfer to Selected Elements Transfer Transfer Hostname ELAN IP Type Role Status Status BOOTP CONFIG Signaling Server 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium Follower Finished Finished NODES 207 179 153 100 Leader Finished Finished Succession 207 179 153 111 Media Card Lea
94. 7 Page 71 of 488 Telephones For information on the various telephones supported on the CS 1000E system refer to Telephones and Consoles Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 367 and IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 72 of 488 Telephones 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 73 of 488 Rack mounting the components Contents This section contains information on the following topics INGCOMCUON os ong 385 5cds0 bee hes hen iet dap aeaedeeeen T3 Lifting system COMpPOHENIS sid kee irik eed enter weeds 74 Guidelines for component placement in arack T Rack mounting a CS 1O00E Call Server 0 76 Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander Fi Rack mounting a Signaling Server susunu runnen 83 Rack mounting a Terminal Server 20 22s ee eee neeee 90 Rack mounting a BayStack 470 Switch 244 90 Rack mounting a BayStack 460 Power over Ethernet unit 90 Introduction All CS 1000E system components are installed in a customer supplied 19 inch rack Also refer to the equipment layout plan and card slot assignment plan for additional information Component air circulation is either from front to back or from side to side Therefore components can be mounted immediately above or below an installed component The rack
95. 8 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files To review and submit IP telephony node configuration files please refer to IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node To add a follower signaling server to an IP telephony node follow the procedure as given in Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Performing a datadump Follow Procedure 55 to perform a datadump using Element Manager This procedure is an alternative to using the CLI to perform a datadump The datadump backs up new IP Telephony node files on the CS 1000E at the same time that it backs up the customer database Procedure 55 Performing a datadump using Element Manager From Element Manager see Figure 76 on page 218 for details on logging in do the following 1 Choose Services gt Backup and Restore gt Call Server from the navigator The Call Server Backup and Restore web page opens see Figure 79 on page 222 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 222 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Figure 79 Call Server Backup and Restore web page Virtual Terminals Bookmarks System Maintenance Loops Superloops SNMP Software IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Maintenance and Reports Configuration Zones Network Address Translation QoS Thresholds Personal Director
96. 8 Port IP Line 3 1 Voice Gateway Powered through a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 50 of 488 System components Table 3 Media Card profile Part 2 of 2 Property Description Cooling Provided by the Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander Connectors The PC Card slot can be used to deliver software front or for additional storage The maintenance port provides access to the card for OA amp M purposes Connectors The Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN back adapter provides connections to the card through the connector labelled Card 1 Card 2 Card 3 or Card 4 that corresponds to the card location See Figure 34 on page 113 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 51 of 488 Figure 6 Media Card Maintenance port Media Gateway The media gateway is shown in Figure 7 on page 52 and described Table 4 on page 52 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 52 of 488 System components Figure 7 5 pair Cable Connectors on the Media Gateway CAUTION Damage to Equipment Do not block equipment ventilation openings Table 4 Media Gateway profile Part 1 of 3 Product Code e NTDU14 Height e less than 5 U 1 U 1 3 4 inch or 4 4 cm 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 53 of 488 Table 4 Media Gat
97. 9 1 7 9 1 7 9 1 9 9 1 1 9 1 7 9 1 7 9 1 17 9 1 C 24 C cars 10 ON 16 COT 8 C 24 CN cooo EEN 16 CON card 4 OONN 16 COOL Err 8 Coo 24 CO caos EON 16 Core 8 E A 24 CON cao EEEN 16 C Te 8 C ee 24 CONN caoi COMIN 16 CT TTT 8 553 CSE9033 End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 360 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways DANGER Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Each Media Gateway and each Media Gateway Expander requires up to four 25 pair cables The CS 1000E requires an additional terminal block at the cross connect terminal to terminate the 9 pin conductor auxiliary cable for the QUA6 Power Fail Transfer Unit PFTU WARNING Do not use the NE A25B cable with the NTRB21 NTAK10 NTBK50 or NTAK79 circuit cards Procedure 91 Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways 1 Loosen the velcro straps at each connector you plan to use 2 Connect a 25 pair cable to each of the connectors that contains a line or trunk card Refer to the card slot assignment plan 3 Tag both ends of each cable with the equipment and connector numbers See Figure 125 on page 361 and Figure 126 on page 361 553 3041 210 Sta
98. AT CPU Get status of CPU and memory TEST CPU Test the CPU Check the LCD states a Perform a visual check of the LCDs b Test and LCDs LD 135 TEST LEDs Test LEDs DSPL ALL c Check that the LCD display matches the software check Test the System Utility card LD 135 Load program STAT SUTL Get the status of the System Utility card TEST SUTL Test the System Utility card Test system redundancy and media devices LD 137 Load program TEST RDUN Test redundancy DATA RDUN _ Test database integrity STAT FMD Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices FMD STAT RMD Status of one or both Removable Media Devices RMD Clear the display and minor alarms on both Call Servers LD 135 Load program CDSP Clear the displays on the cores CMAJ Clear major alarms CMIN ALL Clear minor alarms Check dial tone 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 149 of 488 7 Check applications CallPilot Symposium and so on End of Procedure Switch call processing Procedure 30 Switching call processing LD 135 Load program SCPU Switch call processing from Call Server 1 to Call Server 0 Call Server 0 is now the active call processor End of Procedure Procedure 31 Testing Call Server 1 From active Call Server 0 perform these tests on Call Server 1 1 Perform a redundancy sanity test LD 135 Load program STAT CPU Get status of CPU and memory TEST CPU Test the CPU 2 Check the LC
99. BOOTP requests and waits for a response Since the Follower Signaling Server is not yet configured in an IP Telephony node there is no BOOTP response For more information see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 End of Procedure Use Element Manager to install the Follower Signaling Server in the IP Telephony node Logging in to the Signaling Server Use Procedure 45 on page 196 to log in to the vxWorks shell to access the Signaling Server from a maintenance terminal Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 196 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Procedure 45 Logging in to the Signaling Server Before you begin make sure the DTE DTE null modem cable supplied with the Signaling Server runs between the serial port on the back of the Signaling Server and the maintenance terminal 1 Make sure the Signaling Server is powered up and connected to the maintenance terminal The Signaling Server must boot successfully before the user can log in 2 Press lt CR gt to invoke the login prompt 3 Enter the login credentials Note f the Signaling Server has connected to the Call Server the startup messages indicate if the PBX link is up use the PWD1 login to access the Signaling Server a Enter the default Signaling Server Command Line Interface CLI login admin b Enter the Signaling Server Command Line Interface CLI password e If th
100. Call Servet terier errerrirrenetkt arris o5 Grounding a Signaling Server ees ssarertarene eroi taent bie ews 95 Grounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel 96 Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels 97 Grounding a Media Gateway Expander 0 0 98 Grounding other rack mounted components 4 99 Grounding equipment in the UK icc cey cd eeudecwssaw ent eee vas 101 Connecting CS 1000E system components 103 COMEM ernai aces ev A DEI RVWEW Lee ee HR ewse 103 odito og iis be Roos GAA wR en ewe hae de eee she des 103 Connecting Call Server Oto Call Server soo sce0ssccuncewacen es 104 Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1O00E 106 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet tt Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 112 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter onto a Media Card osc cco cursseacdedeeeedasneadeas 113 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet 114 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 115 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 116 Installing software on the CS 1000E 119 CONC iL cs oon eceeciddand A A E E ET 119 Mioduchon eatea ionene okt eed ie obs eeeks EN ERNES 119 Connecting MG 1000T system components 153 CODING i560 GA ARSGL SOLE inepta ninri er R RAPIDS SOS 153 MoO eee ee ee cee ee
101. Cards Node Maintenance and Reports General Commands General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 111 Element Type Succession Media Card Group Vow X Command vgwShowall 7 RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings 3 PING VGU Service is Enabled Chan ChanState DspMode Codec Tn Reg AirTime rxTsap txTsap 0 Idle Closed n a 0x0810 yes in 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 1 Idle Closed n a 0x0811 yes in 0 0 0 0 0000 O0 0 0s 2 Idle Closed n a 0x0812 yes o 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 01 3 Idle Closed n a 0x0813 yes o 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 4 Idle Closed n a 0x0850 yes o 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 5 Idle Closed n a 0x0851 yes o 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 6 Idle Closed n a 0x0852 yes o 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 7 Idle Closed n a 0x0853 yes in 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 8 Idle Closed n a 0x0890 yes in 0 0 0 0 0000 O 0 6 0 9 Idle Closed n a 0x0891 yes 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 10 Idle Closed n a 0x0892 yes 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 0 0 0 4 gt The following information is provided for each VGW channel Chan Channel number ChanState State of channel Idle Busy Disabled Unequipped DspMode Mode DSP is in Voice Closed Codec Codec frame size used for the call Tn Channel s physical TN in packed format Reg Status of channel s gateway registration Air Time Duration of audio stream connection in seconds Zero when the audio stream is closed txTsap IP address and port the Voice Gateway Media Card is using to send RTP pack
102. Choice gt 13 Enter the data networking and IP telephony parameters for the Signaling Server as prompted e If this is a Leader Signaling Server enter the parameters for the Node ELAN network interface TLAN network interface and Call Server as required See Figure 68 on page 190 For the Call Server If installing the Signaling Server at an office that is not a branch office enter the ELAN network interface IP address of the Call Server If installing the Signaling Server at a branch office enter the ELAN network interface IP address of the MG 1000B Core e If this is a Follower Signaling Server enter the Hostname of the Leader Signaling Server See Figure 69 on page 190 Then go to step 15 on page 192 e If this is a stand alone Signaling Server and not associated with a Call Server that is b was selected in step 10 on page 186 enter the TLAN subnet parameters as required The Call Server IP address is automatically set to 0 0 0 0 See Figure 70 on page 191 Then go to step 14 on page 191 The IP information applies to a temporary IP Telephony node Note P addresses shown in Figure 68 Figure 69 on page 190 and Figure 70 on page 191 are examples Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 190 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 68 Leader Signaling Server configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx
103. Compare with preinstallation SLT output LD 22 Load program REQ SLT EEEE Exit program Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 140 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 4 Print the customer data block in LD 21 LD 21 REQ TYPE CUST wR Load program PRT CDB XX Exit program Reconfigure I O ports and call registers Procedure 24 Reconfiguring I O ports and call registers 1 Evaluate the number of call registers and 500 telephone buffers that are configured for the system suggested minimum values are 4500 and 1000 respectively If changes are required reconfigure the values in LD 17 LD 17 500B 1000 NCR 20000 KKK K Load program Use 1000 as a minimum value Use 20000 as a minimum value Exit program 2 Print the Configuration Record to confirm the changes made in Step 1 LD 22 REQ PRT TYPE CFN KKK K Procedure 25 Load program Set the print option Print the configuration Exit program End of Procedure Switching call processing to the Call Server 1 Plug the Call Server port labeled Lan 1 into the ELAN subnet 2 Initialize using the init button the CP PIV card in the Core 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 3 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 141 of 488 Wait for DONE and then INI messages to display before you continue End of Procedure Test the Call Server Procedure 26 Testing the Call Server 1 N OO FF OMN Veri
104. Configure two IP Phones to register to the Signaling Server on its temporary node These IP Phones must be provisioned on the Call Server Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 198 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 199 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Contents This section contains information on the following topics Inrod ctoi so cis Shoo Gee RE GEMS Se ARERR ARR ieis EAS hws 200 Enabling the Login Name opin a 46 iceansvsaseusaserea tens 201 Configuring login IDs and passwords 000 0000 eee 202 Enabling the multi user Option 12 4 0iseaussesede seuss ones uas 206 Configuring pseudo terntinals PT YS sisi o deveitsivsteasawss 207 Checking PTY Stats rarere ekkan de teew nes be Ree e RES eS 209 Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits 210 Configuring the MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zones 211 Configuring the MG 1000E ports ia sas ecu eaesed Ooawwreaws 213 Configuring Dipitone Receivers 2 02054 gad eeeedoaw awakened 214 Conmeunis Tone Detects 1 iicecricieddtriaiebieiasiciwes 215 Logging in to Element Manager 050sicvoss0 nes eres iae ween 216 Importing preconfigured IP telephony files 219 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files 221 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node 221 Ferlormine a Ca
105. Core The LOCK UNLOCK command can be used in any mode to keep an MG 1000T Expansion in the current mode regardless of the state of the IP link to the primary controller For example a SOTS command forces the selected MG 1000T Expansion into Survival Mode prior to restarting the MG 1000T Core A LOCK command can be issued from the MG 1000T Core prior to a restart This keeps the selected MG 1000T Expansion in Survival Mode until manually returned to Normal Mode Manually returning to Normal Mode reboots the MG 1000T Expansion Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 466 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller These commands are applicable to both modes and can be used to keep an MG 1000T in Survival Mode after the Automatic Switchback occurs The LOCK UNLOCK command is issued in LD 135 LOCK lt cab gt Where cab specified Survivable Media Gateway UNLOCK lt cab gt Where cab specified Survivable Media Gateway Database synchronization The DWL Download command is available in LD 43 DWL lt cab gt Where lt cab gt a specified Survivable Media Gateway Programming the lt cab gt parameter is optional If omitted the database is downloaded to all connected Survivable Media Gateways EDD LCL command local EDD The Invoke Datadump Program EDD command introduces the Invoke Datadump Program Local EDD LCL command It performs a local datadum
106. D Enter the command PWD2 lt xxxx gt Where lt xxxx gt your current level 2 password Enter the command LNAME_OPTION YES System response DEFAULT LOGIN NAMES SAVED MEM AVAIL U P 1015893 USED U P 138773 24981 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 Enter the command REQ KKK End of Procedure Configuring login IDs and passwords For increased security Change the default login username and password The default login is username admin1 and password 0000 as used throughout this guide Configure the Limited Access Password LAPW IDs and passwords 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 203 of 488 Follow Procedure 48 to configure login IDs and passwords Procedure 48 Configuring login IDs and passwords 1 Enter the command LD 17 CFN000 MEM AVAIL U P 1015918 USED U P 138773 24956 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 2 Enter the command REQ CHG 3 Enter the command TYPE PWD 4 Enter the command PWD2 lt xxxx gt Where lt xxxx gt your current level 2 password 5 Enter the command LNAME_OPTION 6 Enter the command NPW1 lt XXXX gt OR lt cr gt
107. D states a Perform a visual check of the LCDs b Test LCDs LD 135 Load program TEST LCDs Test LCDs DSPL ALL c Check that the LCD display matches the software check Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 150 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 3 Test the System Utility card LD 135 Load program STAT SUTL Get the status of the System Utility card TEST SUTL Test the System Utility card Test system redundancy and media devices LD 137 Load program TEST RDUN Test redundancy DATA RDUN Test database integrity STAT FMD Status of one or both Fixed Media Devices FMD STAT RMD Status of one or both Removable Media Devices RMD EEEE Exit the program Clear the display and minor alarms on both Call Servers LD 135 Load program CDSP Clear the displays on the Call Servers CMAJ Clear major alarms CMIN ALL Clear minor alarms Check dial tone Check applications CallPilot Symposium etc End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 151 of 488 Switch call processing Procedure 32 Switching call processing LD 135 Load program SCPU Switch call processing from Call Server 0 to Call Server 1 Call Server 1 is now the active call processor End of Procedure Perform a customer backup data dump installation release Procedure 33 Performing a data dump to backup the customer database 1 Login to the system 2 In
108. E A CONG ci sc anv i See ek AER Reaw RET EER eee REIS 321 Adding a card to an IP telephony node 4 32l Configuring a card as a node Leader 4 6 66 eccadeceag aise seiras 325 Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager 323 Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 327 Saying CONLPUTANION Changes 25 un cienciaraaec weer en E en daws 329 Installing a CompactPlash ses 0 c0s20s tcaw nis eeee iar kettik 330 Installing a card in a Media Gateway 0 00005 335 Vene MCA ides 5 o PaeSeedoew evi denrodiaseadeseg S ER 339 Pirablme a c eaaa dee akee e Eei 347 Dissbhns a Card M orps tarpeita itken TEE RIEAN EERE ESS 348 a 60000 EET E E EEE TETE 349 eE i R EE E E E AE ETT 350 Veriying TUNCHONAUY sps 2k8o 22 S56k innin kentin K IA ae SELES 351 Uporaditie IGsd Wore rasene eua kau reer ESERE 331 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 320 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Introduction The Voice Gateway Media Card provides access to the voice gateway and functions as a Follower to the Signaling Server which is the node Leader and which by default acts as a Master for the node In the absence of the Signaling Server a Voice Gateway Media Card may be an active Leader a backup Leader or a Follower Each customer in a system has only one Leader A Voice Gateway Media Card runs the IP Line 3 1 software It provides voice gate
109. E Installation and Configuration Page 440 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 441 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Contents This section contains information on the following topics CINCOM E EE S ES bearer eheew water were TEET 441 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU 00 442 Installing and connecting a third party PFTU 447 Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone toa PFTU 448 Connecting a t nk toa PPTs oc canes an cciwneciee coe kerrak 452 Introduction Power fail transfer occurs when the main power to the CS 1000E system is cut off When a power interruption occurs the Power Fail Transfer Unit PFTU connects predetermined analog 500 2500 type telephones directly to the Central Office trunks A PFTU is capable of supporting a maximum of five or eight telephones depending on the PFTU type A PFTU can be connected to the AUX connector on a Media Gateway IMPORTANT A PFTU does not support Digital trunks Use Analog trunks if power failure backup is required Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 442 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit The following procedures are provided in this chapter 1 Procedure 115 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU on page 442 2 Procedure 116 Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone
110. Figure 119 on page 344 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 Select Select by Functionality The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in Figure 120 on page 345 The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 Select the ENLC Enable and reset card command from the Card Commands drop down list Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box Click Submit to the right of the text box Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 350 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page End of Procedure Enabling a card unit Follow Procedure 88 to enable a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager Procedure 88 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 119 on page 344 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 Select Select by Functionality The list in the web pa
111. Figure 132 If this is the first node to be added the No nodes are configured message is displayed Figure 132 Node Configuration web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration Node Configuration New Node to Add Import Node Files Node 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Edit Transfer Status Delete 2 Import the Node files from the leader Signaling Server a Click Import Node Files The Import Node Files screen as shown in Figure 133 on page 374 appears b Enter the ELAN IP address of the leader Signaling Server in the input box Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 374 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Figure 133 Import Node Files web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Confiquration Import Node Files Import Node Files Management LAN ELAN IP address of the leader from where to retrieve the node files Click a button to invoke a command 3 Click Import Click OK in the dialog when the operation is complete The Node Summary web page is re displayed showing the new node End of Procedure Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files Follow Procedure 95 to review and submit IP telephony node configuration files Procedure 95 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration 1 From the Node Summary web page see Fi
112. Group B OO FWN PRP q uit p lrevious m ain menu h lelp or lt cr gt redisplay Enter Selection _ 10 Select the M3900 Language Set same as on CS 1000E Enter 1 System response Copying new PSDL Copying new PSDL Copying loadware files 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller Page 239 of 488 Copying language files Copying FIJI files Detected change in system type Pkg 298 299 Detected change in machine type from 0 to 33 Deleting files in directory u db hi Installed BOOTROM p load main_bt ommunication Server 1000 Software Rls 4 5 will be installed WARNING A system restart will be invoked as part of the software installation process Are you sure you wish to perform the installation y n a lbort 11 Perform the installation a Enter y System response if software installation successful Installation completed successfully b The system then reboots Rebooting Once the installation program completes messages appear on the terminal screen When the message INI XXX appears the system is operational End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 240 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 241 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Contents This section co
113. IS N RTEL User ID Password Call Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Reset Copyright 2002 2005 Nortel Networks All rights reserved End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 219 of 488 Importing preconfigured IP telephony files Follow Procedure 54 to import the preconfigured IP telephony files from the Signaling Server Procedure 54 Importing an existing node Figure 77 displays the Element Manager System Information home page Figure 77 Element Manager System Information NORTEL Home Links Virtual Terminals Bookmarks System Maintenance Loops Superloops SNMP Geographic Redundancy Software IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Zones Network Address Translation Q0S Thresholds Personal Directories Software Customers Routes and Trunks Routes and Trunks D Channels Digital Trunk Interface Dialing and Numbering Plans Electronic Switched Network Network Routing Service Flexible Code Restriction Incoming Digit Conversion Services Backup and Restore Date and Time Logs and Reports Securi CS 1000 ELEMENT MANAGER Managing 47 11 143 7 Home System Overview Home System Overview System Identification SNMP Site Name System Name Contact Name System Contact SNMP System Name System Name SNMP Location System Location Call Server Help Log
114. Installation and Configuration Page 124 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E Label s Mounting msdos fs p on dev hda2 fdiskDevCreate dev hda2 dev hda2 partTablePtr 0x12d5ff0c Found partition 2 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 2 type Win95 FAT32 cbioPtr 0x12d26ee8 Tnitializing new slave device 0x12d26ee8 Retrieved old volume params with 80 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 195 61 FAT copies 0 clusters 50115 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 15421 hidden 1010580541 FAT sectors 3057015 Root dir entries 15421 sysId null serial number cfcfc3c3 Label A Disk with 622592 sectors of 512 bytes will be formatted with Volume Parameters FAT type FAT32 sectors per cluster 8 2 FAT copies 77660 clusters 608 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 32 hidden 63 FAT sectors 1216 Root dir entries 0 sysId VX5D0S32 serial number cfcfc3c3 Label vyra 0x12d22e7c 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 125 of 488 Mounting msdos fs d on dev hda3 fdiskDevCreate dev hda3 dev hda3 partTablePtr 0x12d5ff0c Found partition 3 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 3 type Win95 FAT32 cbioPtr Ox12d22e7c Initializing new slave device 0x12d22e7c Retrieved old volume params with 80 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 195 61 FAT copies 0 cluste
115. Maintenance by functionality web page Page 345 of 488 Managing 207 179 153 99 System Maintenance Maintenance Select by Overlay Select by Functionality Select by Overlay gt LD 30 Network and Signaling LD 32 Network and Peripheral Equipment LD 34 Tone and Digit Switch LD 36 Trunk LD 37 Input Output LD 39 Intergroup Switch and System Clock LD 45 Background Signaling and Switching LD 46 Multifrequency Sender LD 48 Link LD 54 Multifrequency Signaling LD 60 Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface LD 75 Digital Trunk LD 80 Call Trace LD 96 D Channel LD 117 Ethernet and Alarm Management LD 135 Core Common Equipment LD 137 Core InputOutput Figure 120 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 346 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Figure 121 Network amp Peripheral Diagnostics web page Managing 207 179 153 99 System Maintenance Network amp Peripheral Diagnostics Network amp Peripheral Diagnostics sher Commands aA Subit card Commands Jaooo amami UnitCommanis HAS ammi M3axxUnitCommands A smm BRISILCULC Commands A ammi Instruction Select command
116. Management LAN ELAN configuration Call server IP address 207 179 153 99 Survivable Succession Media Gateway IP address 207 179 153 102 Signaling port 15000 Range 1024 to 65535 Broadcast port 15001 Range 1024 to 65535 Signaling port 5000 Range 1024 to 65535 Voice port 5200 Range 1024 to 65535 putes Subnet mask 207 179 154 0 255 255 255 224 Remove 5 Enter the Survivable Media Gateway IP address The IP address is the ELAN IP address of the survivable MG 1000T SSC that this IP telephony node registers to if it loses the connection to the MG 1000T Core 6 Click Save and Transfer at the bottom of the Edit web page then click OK to save and transfer the changes End of Procedure Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 475 of 488 Verifying IP telephony node operation in Survival Mode Follow Procedure 121 to verify the operation of a Voice Gateway Media Card in an MG 1000T Expansion in Survival Mode Procedure 121 Verifying the operation of a Voice Gateway Media Card in an MG 1000T expansion in Survivable Mode 1 LD 135 and use the SOTS command to force the MG 1000T Expansion into Survival Mode 2 Check the IP Phones and TTY e Local Mode is visible on the telephone display e f configured check to see if the dial tone is apparent e Special text is also displayed on the TTY connected to the MG 1000T Expansion as shown below TTY
117. Nortel Communication Server 1000 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Document Number 553 3041 210 Document Release Standard 4 00 Date September 2007 Copyright 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Nortel Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Page 3 of 488 Revision history September 2007 Standard 4 00 This document is up issued with corrections from CRs Q01338671 Q01459735 and Q01651880 July 2006 Standard 3 00 This document is up issued with corrections from CR Q001324850 August 2005 Standard 2 00 This document is issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 September 2004 Standard 1 00 This document is issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 4 of 488 Revision history 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 5 of 488 Contents List Of PrOCOdUICS 1 6608 ccce
118. OGRAM kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk Verify Security ID XXXXXXXX KKK KKK KEKE KEKE KKK KEKE KK KEK KEKE KKK KKK KEKE k kk Technology Software Installation Main Menu 1 Media Gateway IP Expansion Cabinet 2 Call Server Main Cabinet q uit h elp or lt cr gt redisplay Enter Selection Release Created Weekday Month Day hh mm ss EDT Year 5 Select Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Software Installation From Software Delivery Card from the menu a Enter 1 System response Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Software Installation Main Menu 1 Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Installation From Software Delivery Card 2 Utilities q uit p lrevious m ain menu h lelp or lt cr gt redisplay Enter Selection 6 Select Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Installation from Software Delivery Card from the menu a Enter 1 System response Do you wish to do IP configuration y n a bort 7 To manually configure the IP go to Step 9 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 248 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller 8 Configure the IP for the CS 1000E to Media Gateway link network automatically using the BootP a Enter 1 System response Media Gateway New IP Parameters Media Gateway IP o a p A Call Server IP Ko Media Gateway NetMask Pk Kiyo Kk Media Gateway Router POS KAO Is this correct y n a bort _ b If IP param
119. P telephony files from the Signaling Server Procedure 94 Importing an existing node Figure 131 displays the Element Manager System Information home page Figure 131 Element Manager System Overview web page NORTEL CS 1000 ELEMENT MANAGER Help Logout Home Managing 207 179 153 99 Links Home System Overview Born hla Home System Overview System System Identification SNMP Maintenance Site Name Loops System Name AEE Contact Name System Contact Software SNMP System Name System Name IP Telephony SNMP Location System Location Nodes Servers Media Cards Call Server Zones n IP Address 207 179 153 99 z Bee oe eee Hania Type Nortel Communication Server 1000S M Personal Directories Version 2121 Software Release 450C Customers Redundancy State NOT APPLICABLE Routes and Trunks CPU and Health State NOT APPLICABLE Routes and Trunks 7 i D Channels Signaling Server Digital Trunk Interface Web Server Dialing and Numbering Plans Users Logged into this Signaling Server Electronic Switched Network Network Routing Service Flexible Code Restriction Incoming Digit Conversion Services Backup and Restore Date and Time Logs and Reports Security 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 373 of 488 1 Select IP Telephony gt Node Servers Media Cards gt Configuration from the navigator The Node Configuration web page opens as shown in
120. Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 364 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 365 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics Inrod ctoi soci gh SSS GEER aikeena aea ied iiaea 365 Before yOu Deli eortrro tretos in kei bead bh anar 366 Configuring MS Internet EXplorer sorccrrarerraricioeseresiik 367 Logging in to Element Manager 6c4 seuss wanes eeeieeaeenes 370 Importing preconfigured IP telephony files 2 000000008 372 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files 374 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node 379 Pertonnmg a Gatdgutip4 054 25th soa seas ieee kereaeevesieus 380 An IP Telephony node is defined as a collection of Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards Each network node has a unique Node ID which is an integer value A node has only one Leader Signaling Server All other Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards are defined as Followers An IP Telephony node must be configured to make a CS 1000 system operational For more information about IP Telephony nodes and their configuration refer to IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 The IP Telephony node database files are backed up along with the customer database by using the EDD command in LD 4
121. Q4151 e Mexico ei Manager 2245 amp WLAN Application Gateway NTTQ4201 A0548961 lt HORA AmBHES NTTQ4211 A0548962 Eupe NTTQ4221 A0548964 lt UK HK NTTQ4231 A0548966 x Switzerland NTTQ4241 A0548967 e Australia New Zealand ATTAR e Mexico Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 407 of 488 Connectivity and power requirements Each IP Phone requires a dedicated 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 10 100BaseT Ethernet interface a small desktop hub or switch if sharing an existing desktop Ethernet connection with a PC a local power supply appropriate for the voltage in the area or a Power over LAN unit The IP Phone 2002 comes with a built in 3 port switch and is ready for LAN powering Installation and configuration procedures This chapter contains the following procedures Procedure 102 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones using the CLI on page 408 Procedure 103 Configuring virtual superloops on page 410 Procedure 104 Configuring the IP Phones on page 411 Procedure 105 Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer on page 417 Procedure 106 Installing IP Phone hardware components on page 420 Procedure 107 Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration on page 425 Procedure 108 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters on page 428 Procedure 109 Entering
122. R OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Always use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Refer to the Circuit Card Description and Installation 553 3001 211 for full descriptions of country specific circuit cards and their installation procedures CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Always handle circuit cards with caution to avoid damage caused by static electricity Always store circuit cards that are not in use in an antistatic bag or the original packaging Wear an antistatic wrist strap such as the one shown in Figure 98 on page 293 when handling circuit cards Static electricity can damage circuit card components 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 293 of 488 Figure 98 Antistatic wrist strap Circuit card options A circuit card that has a switch symbol on its faceplate is equipped with option switches strapping plugs or both Ensure that the option switches or strapping plugs are set correctly Circuit cards can also have daughterboards or other add on devices installed on them Digital trunk cards Digital trunk cards can be installed only in slots 1 to 4 in a Media Gateway The following Digital trunk
123. R gt to accept the current values Current date is WEDNESDAY 16 02 2005 Enter new date dd mm yyyy 18 02 2005 Date is set to FRIDAY 18 02 2005 Current time is 09 47 18 Enter new time hh mm ss 08 38 30 Time is set to 08 38 30 Current date and time is FRIDAY 18 02 2005 08 38 30 e When reinstalling the software on an existing system the system verifies the file systems The disk check reports Filesystems verification succeeded The system summary appears Figure 52 on page 178 Enter a to continue the installation Note For a new installation the data fields in the system summary are blank Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 178 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 52 System Summary CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Hostname SS_Node276_Ldr Role Leader Set TPS Disabled Node ID Vtrk TPS Disabled Node IP NRS Config Alternate SIP H 323 ID SS_Node276_Ldr CS IP AN IP 192 168 10 20 AN IP 192 168 20 20 AN SM 255 255 255 0 JAAN SM 255 255 255 0 GW 192 168 10 1 TLAN GW 192 168 20 1 MAC 00 02 b3 c5 51 c6 TLAN MAC 00 02 b3 c5 51 c7 T aE Please enter lt a gt Continue with Install Tool lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt 6 Test the disk e Ifthe hard drive has never been tested or is corrupt enter a at the
124. Server and Baystack switch has a Serial Data Interface SDI port to be used for software installation and maintenance access The SDI port can be accessed by running a Telnet session through the Terminal Server locally or remotely See Configuring a Terminal Server on page 255 for Terminal Server Setup The SDI port can also be accessed by a local terminal through the SDI connection Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 268 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Setting the TTY terminal port A TTY terminal can be any standard PC running terminal software for example HyperTerminal The TTY terminal port must be configured as Bits per second Baud rate must be the same as the speed of SDI port Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bit 1 Flow control None Terminal Emulation VT100 Traditional terminal SDI connection Figure 87 shows the setup values for a traditional terminal setup 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Page 269 of 488 Figure 87 VT220 setup values Global Set Up On Line Comm1 RS232 Sessions on Comm1 70Hz CRT Saver Printer Shared Display Set Up 80 Columns Light Text Dark Screen Interpret Controls Cursor Auto Wrap Block Style Cursor Jump Scroll General Set up VT200 Mode 7 bit Controls Application Keypad User Defined Keys Unlocked Normal Cursor Keys User Features Unlocked No New Line Multinational Communicatio
125. Switch Figure 11 Ethernet switch 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 63 of 488 A third party data network switch can be used with the system For more information refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 BayStack 460 Layer 2 switch The BayStack 460 Layer 2 switch shown in Figure 12 on page 63 adds power in addition to data communications over standard Category 5 LAN drops for powering the IP Phones The LAN power system eliminates the need to connect each telephone to an AC power outlet saving in desktop wiring and also allowing centralized UPSs for power backups Using a Power over LAN unit eliminates the need to use separate power transformers for each IP Phone Figure 12 Power over LAN unit MRV Terminal Server The Terminal Server described in Table 8 on page 65 provides the dedicated rlogin service used to establish serial connection between a CS 1000E and various serial devices The IP based Terminal Server provides standard serial ports for applications that use a serial port interface These applications include billing systems that analyze Call Detail Recording CDR records Site Event Buffers SEB that track fault conditions and various legacy applications such as Property Management System PMS interface and intercept Computer applications In addition serial ports are used to connect maintenance terminals and modems for support sta
126. T Expansion is shown for illustration purpose however the synchronization is performed sequentially on all Survivable MG 1000T Expansions DAT command Use the DAT command to print the data issue and creation date of the CS 1000E s primary and backup databases as well as those of the Survivable Media Gateways The software release of the Survivable Media Gateways must match that of the CS 1000E The DAT command is available in LD 43 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 469 of 488 Figure 156 SWP command operation SWP command operation 1 Swap rec and bak on MG 1000T Core Main Memory database in use oO S oO database bak External Primary Backup PCMCIA Drive Flash Drive Flash Drive 2 Swap rec and bak on MG 1000T Expansion Main Memory database in use database bak SURVIVALBLE MG 1000T Expansion External Primary Backup PCMCIA Drive Flash Drive Flash Drive optional 553 AAA2048 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 470 of 488 Figure 157 RES command Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller 1 Copy the database as imp file 2 Rename the database rec file to bak 3 Rename the database tmp file to rec MG 1000T Core External PCMCIA Drive 4 Copy MG 1000T Core external database to MG 1000T Expansion s c drive as tmp
127. TR EAR ORDER eRe 231 Procedure 59 Installing software on an MG 1000E SSC 236 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 22 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 60 Installing software on an SSC 0c e eee 245 Procedure 61 Setting system time and date 00 00000s 250 Procedure 62 Connecting a Terminal Server to the system 256 Procedure 63 Configure IP address for the Terminal Server 257 Procedure 64 Run telnet from PC 0 00 cee ee eee ees 258 Procedure 65 Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet Terminal Server 000 cece eee eee ee eee 259 Procedure 66 Configuring a transparent rlogin port 260 Procedure 67 Configuring a transparent rlogin port 263 Procedure 68 Accessing an MRV Console Port through the On board modem 0 00 cee ee 264 Procedure 69 Connecting SDI ports on the Media Gateways 272 Procedure 70 Connecting the maintenance PC to a Signaling Server cccccccscseevrcvicsevesviavenns 273 Procedure 71 Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces 278 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 List of Procedures Page 23 of 488 Procedure 72 Checking the status of MG 1000T Core to MG 1000T Expansion 1 4 100BaseT links 283 Procedure 73 Checking the status of the MG 1000T trunks 287 Procedure 74 Check CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T
128. W RMD to FMD yes install for rel 0450C t 4 4 4 Dependency Lists no t 4 4 AUTO CSU Feature no AUTO CSU Disabled t 4 4 4 IPMG Software no t 4 4 4 H Database yes l l t 4 4 CP BOOTROM yes t 4 4 4 Verify successful installation and enter lt CR gt when ready 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 137 of 488 19 Upon returning to the main Install Menu enter q to quit INSTALL lor installation Succession Software opportunity to quit at any Please enter KCR gt gt lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt lt q gt The Software Installation Tool will install Database and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughout the installation and given the ka gt To install Software Kb gt To install Software Ke gt To install Database only Kd gt To install CP BOOTROM only Kt gt To go to the Tools menu Kk gt To install Keycode only For Feature Expansion use OVL143 Kp gt To install 3900 set Lang
129. a Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 000eeeeeees 166 Procedure 42 Downloading the Signaling Server CD image 170 Procedure 43 Creating a Signaling Server Software CD ROM 171 Procedure 44 Installing the Signaling Server software 172 Procedure 45 Logging in to the Signaling Server 196 Procedure 46 Verifying the Signaling Server Ethernet connection 197 Procedure 47 Enabling the Login Name option 006 201 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 List of Procedures Page 21 of 488 Procedure 48 Configuring login IDs and passwords 203 Procedure 49 Enabling the multi user option 020 000 206 Procedure 50 Configuring pseudo terminals PTYs 207 Procedure 51 Checking PTY status 0 cece eee eee eee 209 Procedure 52 Configuring MG 1000E Bandwidth Management ZONE oreina tees shitenG ieee eee 211 Procedure 53 Launching Element Manager 000 000s 216 Procedure 54 Importing an existing node 0 eee eens 219 Procedure 55 Performing a datadump using Element Manager 221 Procedure 56 Installing an SSC NTM400 Software daughterboard and NTDK57 NT_REM remote security device 227 Procedure 57 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port TOON SSC 4 6i 4 060 d4 edo ODEO ERRRE DAES 227 Procedure 58 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port TOON SSC 4656640 2d wee
130. a Small System Controller Contents This section contains information on the following topics MEON cc een dee oe eS e n th Pee Sohhone PUREED SWS 220 Adding a software daughterboard and remote security device 226 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port 221 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port 231 Introduction An NTDK20 Small System Controller SSC must be installed in each Media Gateway Security devices and Daughterboards can be installed on the SSC prior to its placement in a Media Gateway See Table 13 for details on the SSC including available accessories Table 13 Small System Controller profile Part 1 of 2 Property Description Order Code NTDK20HA Power e Powered through a Media Gateway Cooling e Provided by the Media Gateway Card slots e None Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 226 of 488 Configuring a Small System Controller Table 13 Small System Controller profile Part 2 of 2 Property Description Connectors Port 1 100BaseT Port 2 100BaseT optional Port 3 100BaseT Port 4 100BaseT optional Required Remote Security Device NTDK57DA components Software daughterboard NTM400 Accessories Flash daughterboard NTTK25BA 100BaseT daughterboard single port NTDK99AA 100BaseT daughterboard dual port NTDK83AA Configuring an SSC can involve 1 Procedure 56
131. ace objects on the power cord Do not locate the product where persons can walk on the plug Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as fire or electrical shock can result Never push objects of any kind into the telephone through the slots The objects can come in contact with dangerous voltage points Also parts can short out causing the risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not disassemble a telephone product Remove the telephone plug from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified personnel if the power supply cord or plug is damaged or worn liquid has spilled into the telephone the telephone has been exposed to rain or water the telephone has been dropped or damaged the product shows a distinct change in performance the telephone does not function correctly under normal operating conditions Avoid using a telephone except a type without a cord during an electrical storm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the area of the leak 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 37 of 488 Installation summary Contents This section contains information on the following topics aOd occ ceerdes sotedbene Lseiaateaeieehesamencees af mslaton taske ca Fi eoee kn eaire eoe tea eee ane hee irena Ta 38 Introduction WARNING B
132. ach password digit entered the actual password is not displayed Note 2 If this screen times out or if you do not successfully enter the password in three attempts the IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed The IP Phone prompts TN X X 15 Enter the IP Phone s virtual TN The IP Phone displays the logo the date and time and the DN keys 16 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display End of Procedure Using Set Based Installation Set Based Installation enables the delegation of telephone installation to trusted users To have a trusted user perform this function configure a temporary IP Phone Installer Password for the system See Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer passwords on page 417 Note This feature can be an alternative to LD 11 or OTM to configure IP Phones on the Call Server Follow Procedure 110 to use Set Based Installation Procedure 110 Using Set Based Installation This procedure is the same as Procedure 107 on page 425 Procedure 108 on page 428 and Procedure 109 on page 430 except when the system response displayed on the IP Phone is as follows If you did not configure an IP Phone Installer Password the IP Phone prompts Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 434 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones No
133. address for CDP DN from NRS NRS provides address of GW SS endpoint of CSO Signaling Server directs call to GW SS CSO Sy CSO tells IP Phone to ring and sends Alerting to SSC CS 1000E te IP Phone off hook to answer message to TPS SS CSO 10 t IP Phone CSO sends connect to SSC using GW SS and MG 1000T SS s Primary Controller cuts through media between PSTN DSP and IP Phone and sends Connect message to PSTN 10 Media path flows between DSP and IP Phone CONDOR ON This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 34 Connecting the MG 1000T Core to an MG 1000T Expansion on page 158 e Procedure 35 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet on page 161 e Procedure 36 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet on page 162 e Procedure 37 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet on page 163 e Procedure 38 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card on page 164 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 156 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components e Procedure 39 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN on page 165 e Procedure 40 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet on page 166 e Procedure 41 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion on page 166 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to a Survivable MG 1000T Expansion Follow Procedure 34 on page 158 to connect the MG 1000T Core to the Su
134. age 162 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 cable to an RJ 45 TLAN network interface on the data network switch BayStack 470 24T End of Procedure Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter onto a Media Card The Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter shown in Figure 44 on page 164 provides access to the TLAN and ELAN Ethernet Ports The adapter breaks out the signals from the I O connector to the following e ELAN management network interface e TLAN telephony network interface e one RS 232 local console port Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 164 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Figure 44 Diagram of the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter TLAN RJ 45 ELAN RJ 45 RS 232 Connector LAN socket LAN socket Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port Identification Label 50 pin connector Procedure 38 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card 1 Open the Media Card package NTDU41CA 2 Remove the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter 3 Save the other items from the package for use in Installing a CompactFlash on page 330 4 Insert the adapter shown in Figure 44 into the connector Card 1 Card 2 Card 3 or Card 4 that corresponds to the location of the Media Card For example Figure 45 on page 165 the Media Card is installed in card slot 1 Therefore the Adaptor is installed in
135. age 423 Secure the telephone footstand to the base of the telephone Use the angle adjustment grip on the top rear of the telephone to adjust the position Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 423 of 488 Figure 149 IP Phone connections Ethane Data Suitch wi Passport 100 8600 or sl Baystad D a 4 rz on fz z Ss E Y S E Data DC 4 volts End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 424 of 488 Configuring the IP Phone boot parameters The IP Phone boot parameters are configured during telephone installation The following configuration modes are available Manual configuration All ofthe IP Phone s boot parameters are statically configured at the IP Phone See Procedure 107 Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration on page 425 Partial Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP mode Works with standard DHCP server The DHCP server automatically provides the IP Phone with an IP address the remainder of the IP Phone s boot parameters are statically configured at the IP Phone See Procedure 108 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters on page 428 Full DHCP mode Requires special configuration of the DHCP server to recognize the IP Phone The DHCP server prov
136. ation 10 11 12 13 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 426 of 488 Enter the default gateway The IP Phone prompts S1 IP x x x x Enter the Server 1 IP node IP The IP Phone prompts S1 PORT 4100 Enter the Server 1 port The IP Phone prompts S1 ACTION 1 Enter the Server 1 action The IP Phone prompts S1 RETRY COUNT 10 Enter the Server 1 retry count The IP Phone prompts S2 Enter same information as for Server 1 The IP Phone prompts VLAN 0 No 1 Ma 2 Au 0 Choose one of the following a Entero to configure no VLAN The IP Phone displays Locating server After several seconds the IP Phone prompts Connect Svc Node x TN X X Go to step 14 on page 427 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration 14 15 16 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 427 of 488 b Enter 1 to configure manual VLAN The IP Phone prompts VLAN xX Go to step 14 on page 427 c Press the OK key The IP Phone prompts Invalid TN x x Reason Unequipped Go offhook to do SBI Enter the VLAN ID The IP Phone displays Locating server If you did not configure an IP Phone Installer Password after several seconds the IP Phone prompts Node x TN X X Enter the node number and the IP Phone s virtual TN then go to Step 18 If you configured an IP Phone Installer Password the IP Phone prompts Node x PassWord x Enter the node number and the temporary or a
137. board single port using metal screw downs on the SSC Route the NTDU0606 Ethernet cable through the plastic guides on the SSC 4 Install the SSC in the Media Gateway 5 Connect the NTDU0606 Ethernet cable to port 1 of the Media Gateway bulkhead connector shown in Figure 85 on page 234 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 for each Media Gateway Figure 85 Bulkhead connector on a Media Gateway End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 235 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller Contents This section contains information on the following topics TACIWENON ss oi Gicde Hee euaa eee ee eee aes eee ad EES 235 Installing software on an MG 1000E SSC 0 236 Introduction This chapter describes the software installation on the Small System Controller SSC in an MG 1000E using the software delivery card PC card interface The SSC card has a PC card interface through a socket located on its faceplate The PC card socket can accommodate a Software Delivery card used for software upgrading and for backup data storage This chapter contains Procedure 59 Installing software on an MG 1000E SSC on page 236 CAUTION Service Interruption The Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000E Release 4 5 software must be installed prior to installing the SSC software in the Media Gateways Media Gateways can be installed in any order Communication Server 1000E Instal
138. c acd nae es thed eben ecedawekenes BayStack 460 Layer 2 SWieh sos ene ok ice eeeswow eeu dew eseda MRY Tetmimal Server s 245i cedusaninicgeseoeitad nese iwes WHE neh bad W855 Sede Sele VES EEE AEEA es SVSISMUEADIES coc avccadioad Piesdprodbeseedercehwragasccws Miscellaneous system components 2 02 00 02 0c eee e eee eee Uninterruptible Power Supply 22 cc 2ss0aecineiwieeieeecaacs TEIEpPRONES 56s oe 26 oc Kade tadeiaswwas 0 eNd Rack mounting the components LOUIS 254ohcb ake ihbbde iat eecleedesuneoeeeategasasaa Lil 0 ee ee ee ee oe ee ae ee ee ee ee eee ee ee es Lifting systemi COMpONeNis reira r iredi io duk eda kot OREA EEA Guidelines for component placement in a rack Rack mounting a CS 1000E Call Server 245 Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander Rack mounting a Signaling Server oo caste wees daeeaeenes geass Rack mounting a Terminal Server 0 0 0 0 00008 Rack mounting a BayStack 470 Switch 0004 Rack mounting a BayStack 460 Power over Ethernet unit 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 42 44 45 45 49 51 57 60 61 63 63 65 65 68 69 Contents Page 7 of 488 Installing system grounds 050555 91 CONICS oe Gib eee hd 46 844 Fee SR SN eee eRe 91 Au 0a Secs Gee ee ee a ee ea ee ee ere 91 Installing a ground bats co cccee cee aber eter nee ee awit atinns 92 Grounding a CS 1000E
139. cal Physical Logical Physical Logical card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot card slot Media Gateway Media Gateway Expansion Note The bottom most card slot in the Media Gateway is reserved for the SSC card 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Basic system telephony configuration Page 483 of 488 TN assignment Table 64 shows the TN assignments for the MG 1000E Table 2 TN assignments for MG 1000E 000 0 01 000 O 02 000 0 03 000 O 04 000 0 07 000 0 08 000 0 09 000 0 10 000 1 01 000 1 02 000 1 03 000 1 04 000 1 07 000 1 08 000 1 09 000 1 10 004 0 01 004 0 02 004 0 03 004 O 04 004 0 07 004 0 08 004 0 09 004 0 10 004 1 01 004 1 02 004 1 03 004 1 04 004 1 07 004 1 08 004 1 09 004 1 10 008 0 01 008 O 02 008 0 03 008 O 04 008 0 07 008 0 08 008 0 09 008 0 10 008 1 01 008 1 02 008 1 03 008 1 04 008 1 07 008 1 08 008 1 09 008 1 10 012 001 012 0 02 012 0 03 012 0 04 012 0 07 012 0 08 012 0 09 012 0 10 012 1 01 012 1 02 012 1 03 012 1 04 012 1 07 012 1 08 012 1 09 012 1 10 016 0 01 016 0 02 016 0 03 016 O 04 016 0 07 016 0 08 016 0 09 0160 10 016 1 01 016 1 02 016 1 03 016 1 04 016 1 07 016 1 08 016 1 09 016 1 10 020 0 01 020 0 02 020 0 03 020 0 04 020 0 07 020 0 08 020 0 09 020 0 10 020 1 01 020 1 02 020 1 03 020 1 04 020 1
140. cards can be installed NTAKO9 1 5 Mbit DTI PRI NTAK10 2 0 Mbit DTI NTAK79 2 0 Mbit PRI NTBK22 MISP NTBK350 2 0 Mbit BRI Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 294 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card e NTRB21 TMDI 1 5 Mbit DTI PRI e NT6D70 SILC e NT6D71 UILC For additional information about installing Digital trunk cards refer to the following documents e ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Configuration 553 3001 201 e ISDN Basic Rate Interface Installation and Configuration 553 3001 218 e ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance 553 3001 517 e ISDN Basic Rate Interface Maintenance 553 3001 518 Connecting a trunk Follow Procedure 75 to connect a trunk Procedure 75 Connecting a trunk 1 From the assignment record determine the location of the trunk connection and its associated Terminal Number TN at the cross connect terminal 2 With cross connect wire connect the trunk to the TN Make sure that the wiring is not reversed and that it is on the correct terminals e Table 20 on page 295 to Table 22 on page 298 list the connections for trunks e For European trunk connections see Table 23 on page 300 to Table 31 on page 309 e For UK trunk connections see Table 32 on page 311 to Table 38 on page 318 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 295 of 488 Note See Installing and cross con
141. connecting an external alarm to the CS 1000E system e through an alarm port assigned in software e through contacts in a QUA6 Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 456 of 488 Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 The system can be equipped with an alarm port that is assigned in software Connect an analog line to an analog 500 250 type telephone or another similar type of ringing or alerting device Follow Procedure 118 to install an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 Procedure 118 Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 1 Install an analog 500 2500 type line as described in Installing and configuring IP Phones on page 395 2 Connect an analog 500 2500 type telephone or another similar alerting device used as an alarm to the line 3 Use LD 15 to assign an alarm port see Table 60 Note f the DN assigned to the alarm is accidentally called the alarm activates To avoid false alarms make sure the DN is not already assigned Table 60 LD 15 Assign an alarm port Change existing data Customer Data Block Customer Number as defined in LD 15 Alarm Directory Number End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting an external alarm froma PFTU Page 457 of 488 Installing an alarm
142. d T links ESSFUL ESSFUL ESSFUL ESSFUL Note Replace the sample IP addresses with the IP addresses from your Planning and Engineering group 10 Exit from LD 117 Enter the command RRKK End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Verifying the network Page 287 of 488 Checking MG 1000T trunking functionality To check trunking on the MG 1000T follow Procedure 73 on page 287 Procedure 73 Checking the status of the MG 1000T trunks 1 Install an i2050 on MG 1000T core Refer to IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for additional information 2 Establish a call from the i2050 to a telephone on CS 1000E using CDP number Establish a call from i2050 to the PSTN 4 Establish a call from the i2050 to a telephone on the CS 1000E through the PSTN using lt local AC code gt lt NXX gt for example 9 967 5555 End of Procedure Establish CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T To check CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T follow procedure To terminate incoming DID calls the number of digits picked up at the terminating node for call termination from the Called Number of the message is based on the length of LDN value LDNO is considered for this by default Therefore to ensure that all the five digits of the DN are considered for call termination LDNO should have a five digit number Procedure 74 Check CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T 1 Establish a Listed Directory Number in LD
143. d 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 67 of 488 Table 9 CS 1000E cables Part 1 of 3 Component Descriptions Cable Kits Communication Server 1000E Call Server NTDU62 Cables amp Accessories Quantity Qty of 2 MRV Terminal Server cables for connecting COM port 1 of the Call Server to the Terminal Server HS cross over cable used to connect the two call processors for redundancy NTDU6302 NTRC17BA Media Gateway Media Gateway Expander Media Gateway cable kit NTDU25BA PC Maintenance Cable for accessing media card from the faceplate Three Port SDI cable for connecting MG 1000T to administration and maintenance ports Can be used for MG 1000Es during initial configuration AUX cable for Power Failure Transfer if required 25 pin M F adapter can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports 25 pin F F adapter can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports Wrist strap 25 pin F F Null modem adapter can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports 25 pin M F Null modem adapter can be used with the NTBK48AA cable for interconnecting to TTY ports RJ45 ethernet cable used to connect dual and single port 100BT daughter cards from the SSC to the Media Gateway bulk head Expansion cable kit NTDK89AA Communication Server 1000E NTAG81CA NTBK48AA NTAK1 104 A0601396 A0601397 A0783105 A0378652 A0381016 NTDUO606
144. d Reports from the navigator The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens as shown in Figure 115 on page 340 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 342 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card 2 Open the desired node by clicking on the next to the Node ID This displays the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards belonging to the node as shown in Figure 116 on page 341 3 Click GEN CMD for the desired Voice Gateway Media Card The General Commands web page opens as shown in Figure 117 Figure 117 General Commands Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Maintenance and Reports General Commands General Commands Element IP 207 179 153 111 _ Element Type Succession Media Card Group Command Select A Group Y RUN IP address 207 179 153 99 Number of Pings 3 PING Click a button to invoke a command 4 From the Group drop down list select Vgw 5 From the Command drop down list select vgwShowAll 6 Click RUN Figure 118 on page 343 shows the General Commands web page with the output from the vgwShowAll command The output shows information about all the voice gateway channels 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 343 of 488 Figure 118 vgwShowaAll result Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media
145. d bandwidth information Enter the command PRT ZONE Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 409 of 488 5 Exit from LD 117 Enter the command kkkk Table 50 Bandwidth management zones configuration commands in LD 117 Command Description NEW ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Create a new zone where xxx zone number 0 255 p1 Intrazone available bandwidth 0 10000 100000 Kbps p2 Intrazone preferred strategy BQ for Best Quality or BB for Best Bandwidth p3 Interzone available bandwidth 0 10000 100000 Kbps p4 Interzone preferred strategy BQ for Best Quality or BB for Best Bandwidth p5 Zone resource type shared or private NEW ZONE xxx Create a new zone with default values for the parameters p1 10000 Kbps p2 BQ p3 10000 Kbps p4 BQ p5 shared CHG ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Change parameters of a zone All parameters must be re entered even those that are unchanged OUT ZONE xxx Remove a zone DIS ZONE xxx Disable a zone When a zone is disabled no new calls are established inside from or toward this zone ENL ZONE xxx Enable a zone PRT ZONE xxx Print zone and bandwidth information Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 410 of 488 End of Procedure Configuring virtual superloops Follow Procedure 103 to
146. d consecutive attempt is unsuccessful then the Software Installation Program returns to the main menu Any data entered during this session is lost 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Page 245 of 488 Installing software on an SSC IMPORTANT Before proceeding ensure that the required hardware is correctly installed and that all connections are secure Follow Procedure 60 to power up a new system installation in preparation for loading the software Procedure 60 Installing software on an SSC 1 Test the power outlet Make sure that the correct voltage is present before you plug the power cord into the outlet The source must match the label at the back of the equipment 2 Connect the power cord from the power connectors at the back of the Media Gateway to an AC power source See Figure 86 on page 246 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 246 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Figure 86 Power connectors Media Gateway power cord 3 Ensure that the system terminal TTY is connected to the cable marked port 0 on the NTBK48 3 port cable of the Media Gateway 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Page 247 of 488 4 Turn the Media Gateway power switch to ON System response SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PR
147. d in Figure 2 on page 44 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 43 of 488 Figure 1 CS 1000E Core Call Server top view Fixed Media Drive FMD The on board CF is referred to as the Fixed Media Disk FMD and the faceplate CF is referred to as the Removable Media Disk RMD CP PIV has the following new hardware e ACP PIV processor board See Figure 1 and Figure 2 on page 44 e A blank panel Note The front panel USB port on the CP PIV card is intended for future applications The Call Server uses IP protocols to control all IP Phones media services and interfaces to other gateways and applications Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 44 of 488 System components The CS 1000E Call Server has a second processor running in warm standby mode This processor Core Call Server 1 resides in a duplicate chassis that can be located anywhere Figure 2 CS 1000E Core Call Server front view Removable Media Drive RMD Lan 1 Lan 2 USB Port COM 1 COM 2 INIT RESET Backup and restore enhancements The backup rules group of commands was introduced in CS 1000 Release 4 0 with the single rule type Secondary Call Server SCS Backup and restore 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 45 of 488 enhancements apply to both CP PII and CP PIV system configurations unless otherwise noted Note This feature does not actua
148. d modem The Terminal Server provides IP connections to each Pseudo TTY PTY ports 0 15 for monitoring CDR and traffic reports The MRV IR 8020M 101 Terminal Server is supported by the CS 1000E system The IR 8020M 101 In Reach Standalone has 20 Console Ports and a V 90 internal modem A 19 inch rack mount kit is provided with the unit On the MRV IR 8020M 101 Terminal Server port 20 is the default management port It will be used for primary configuration of the IP address mask address and gateway address Port 20 is reserved for configuring the Terminal Server in a CS 1000E system Port 1 to 19 can be configured for Serial Data Interface for the CSE1000E system components IMPORTANT Before connecting the Terminal Server to another component of the CS 1000E system read and understand the documentation provided by the Terminal Servers manufacturer This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 62 Connecting a Terminal Server to the system on page 256 e Procedure 63 Configure IP address for the Terminal Server on page 257 e Procedure 64 Run telnet from PC on page 258 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server Page 255 of 488 e Procedure 65 Accessing a CS 1000E from a PC through telnet Terminal Server on page 259 e Procedure 66 Configuring a transparent rlogin port on page 260 e Procedure 68 Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on board modem on page
149. de Ethernet Host PRIMARY_EN ET Internet address Broadcast address Ethernet address Netmask 0xff000000 15 packets received 0 input errors 0 collisions 100 Mbps Full Duplex gei unit number 0 47 11 226 10 47 11 226 31 00 c0 8b 07 a5 9e Subnetmask Oxffffffed 20 packets sent 0 output errors 4 Exit from LD 137 Enter the command RKKK 5 Access LD 117 Enter the commana LD 117 6 Verify active host table Enter the command STAT HOST System response Active Internet Host Table ID Hostname IP Address localhost 127 0 0 1 1 LOCAL_PPP_IF 137 135 192 4 2 REMOTE_PPP_IF 100 1 1 1 3 ACTIVECPU 47 11 223 68 4 INACTIVECPU 47 11 223 69 5 DEV_SIDEO_HSP 19232 3 10 7 DEV_SIDE1_HSP 192 23 EL 7 Verify active routing table Enter the command STAT ROUTE 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Verifying the network Page 281 of 488 System response Active Internet Routing Table 1 207 179 154 0 207 179 153 97 0 qu0 z 207 179 153 96 207 179 153 99 0 qu0 i 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 lo0 200 30 200 13 200 30 200 13 3 ipDB2 m 200 30 200 23 200 30 200 13 3 ipDB2 207 179 153 103 207 179 153 103 1 ipDBO 207 179 153 104 207 179 153 103 1 ipDBO Ping IP addresses on the ELAN network a Enter the command PING 192 11 0 1 System response PING 192 11 0 1 SUCCESSFUL b Enter the command PING 192
150. de x TN X X 1 Enter the node number and the IP Phone s virtual TN then go to Step 4 If you configured an IP Phone Installer Password the IP Phone prompts Node x PassWord 0 2 Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator IP Phone Installer Password Note 1 An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered the actual password is not displayed Note 2 lf this screen times out or if you do not successfully enter the password in 3 attempts the IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed The IP Phone prompts TN X X 3 Enter the IP Phone s virtual TN 4 Press the OK key The IP Phone responds Unequipped 5 Lift the handset The system accepts the TN 6 Listen for the continuous dial tone The system response displayed on the IP Phone is as follows Model 20 7 Press the key to select the default model or enter the model number and press 8 Listen for a special tone The system response displayed on the IP Phone is as follows OK ZONE 0 9 Press the key to select the default zone or enter the zone number and press The system response displayed on the IP Phone is as follows 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 10 11 12 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 435 of 488 OK EXTENSION 2244 Press the key to select the default DN or ent
151. der Finished Finished The previous status of the node displays and the failure reason is displayed for elements in nodes that failed to get configuration files BOOTP TAB and CONFIG INI from the CS 1000E The Transfer Status web page has five buttons e Selected All Selects all the elements in the node that is it adds a check mark in each element s check box e Unselect All Unselects all the elements in the node that is it removes the check marks for all the selected elements e Transfer to Selected Elements Re transfers node configuration files only to selected elements regardless of a Transfer Failed state e Transfer to Failed Elements Transfers only node configuration files to elements in a Transfer Failed state The Transfer to Failed Elements button is displayed only when at least one element on the Node failed to transfer either a BOOTP TAB or CONFIG INI in the previous operation 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 379 of 488 e Cancel Closes the Transfer Status pages without performing any action and displays the Node Summary web page If the Signaling Server configuration was changed on the Edit web page reboot the Signaling Server End of Procedure Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node Follow Procedure 96 to add a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in Element Manager Procedure 96
152. dia Card Figure 101 Cards Cards Add Card 207 179 153 109 Properties Remove Card 207 179 153 111 Properties Remove Card 0 0 0 0 Properties Remove Role Unknown Management LAN ELAN IP address 0 0 00 gt Management LAN ELAN MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Voice LAN TLAN IP address 0 0 00 gt Voice LAN TLAN gateway IP address 0 0 01 Hostname Hostname caan st Card processor type Succession Media Card azo o Enable set TPS jV System name System location o System contact C Signaling Servers Add 6 Save the node a Click Save and Transfer at the bottom of the Edit web page b Click OK to save this node End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 325 of 488 Configuring a card as a node Leader A Voice Gateway Media Card remains at the default Follower setting in a CS 1000E system A Signaling Server is the IP telephony node Leader In an IP telephony node without a Signaling Server one of the Voice Gateway Media Cards must be configured as a Leader If this is your configuration see the ZP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for a detailed configuration procedure Normally Voice Gateway Media Cards default as Followers If you need to configure a Voice Gateway Media Card as a Follower see the ZP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 36
153. dministrator IP Phone Installer Password Note 1 An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered the actual password is not displayed Note 2 lf this screen times out or if you do not successfully enter the password in three attempts the IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed The IP Phone prompts TN 3 XX Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 428 of 488 17 Enter the IP Phone s virtual TN The IP Phone displays the logo the date and time and the DN keys 18 Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display End of Procedure Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters Follow Procedure 108 to enter IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters Procedure 108 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters 1 Power the IP Phone Within four seconds the Nortel logo appears When the Nortel logo appears on the display you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right Note f the Nortel logo times out repeat step 1 and step 2 For the following prompts a Press the BKSpace backspace or Clear keys to change an entry b Enter new values using the telephone s keypad c Press the OK key to accept your selecti
154. ds Configure Digitone Receivers in LD 13 LD 13 Configure the Digitone Receivers pem o a REA NEW CHG Add or change the existing data TYPE ee Type of data block a a DTR MFC MFE MFK5 MFK6 N l Configuring Terminal Number loop for CS 1000E system MG 1000E requiring Digitone Receivers s Oor1 c 14 or 15 to access the integrated MG 1000E tone circuits u 0 7 DTMF detectors DTR 0 3 MFR MFC MFE MFK5 MFK6 units on card 15 Tone Detectors Tone Detectors when required are configured in a manner similar to that for Digitone Receivers The SSC card in the MG 1000E provides four units of Multifrequency Senders and Receivers These units are configured on card 15 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 216 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server of the MG 1000E In addition Multifrequency Transmit Level codes MFTLO and MFTL1 must be configured in LD 97 LD 97 Configure Tone Detectors Prompt Response Comment Change existing data System Parameters for Peripheral equipment Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier O for MG 1000E Multifrequency transmit level code for Identifier 1 for MG 1000E Logging in to Element Manager To log in to Element Manager follow the steps in Procedure 53 on page 216 Element Manager supports Microsoft TM Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 for Windows operating systems Before following this procedure see S
155. e Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 370 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Logging in to Element Manager Follow Procedure 93 to log in to Element Manager Procedure 93 Logging in to Element Manager 1 Open the web browser 2 Enter the Signaling Server Node IP address in the Address Bar of the browser window and press Enter on the keyboard Note This address can be the ELAN IP TLAN IP or Node IP depending on the network in use The ELAN IP address may be required instead of the Node IP address to access to the Element Manager login web page in secure environments 3 Element Manager opens and the Login web page appears see Figure 130 on page 371 a Enter the User ID and Password of the CS 1000E UserID admint1 or any LAPW Password 0000 b Enter the ELAN IP address of the CS 1000E in the CS IP Address field c Click Login 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 371 of 488 Figure 130 Element Manager login gt CS 1000 ELEMENT MANAGER gt THIS IS NORTEL User ID Password Call Server IP Address 2o71 79 153 99 Reset Copyright 2002 2005 Nortel Networks All rights reserved End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 372 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Importing preconfigured IP telephony files Follow Procedure 94 to import the preconfigured I
156. e to telephone 553 8350 EPS End of Procedure Connecting a telephone without a PFTU See Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit on page 441 for connecting telephones with the PFTU 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Page 389 of 488 Procedure 99 Connecting a telephone without a PFTU 1 Locate the telephone terminations on the cross connect terminal 2 Connect one end of the cross connect wire to the leads of the telephone 3 Locate the Line card terminations on the cross connect terminal 4 Connect the other end of the cross connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block 5 Activate the telephone End of Procedure Connecting an off premise telephone Connect off premise analog 500 2500 type telephones through an NT1R20 Off premise Line card or NTAK92AA Off Premise Protection Module Each NTAK92AA module can connect up to four analog 500 2500 type telephones and can interface with the NT8D09 Message Waiting Line card DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The message waiting Line card produces 150 volts which is considered hazardous on off premise telephones Make sure that the 150 volts are disabled on off premise telephones The voltage is disabled when the telephone s Class of Service CLS is Message Waiting Lamp Denied LPD and Message Waiting Denied MWD in LD 10 Refer to the Software Input Output Administration 553
157. e 111 Inserting the Retaining Pin 7 Turn the card over to view the front of the card Ensure the Retaining Pin is in place as shown Figure 112 on page 334 Figure 112 Retaining Pin fully inserted End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 335 of 488 Installing a card in a Media Gateway A Voice Gateway Media Card can be installed in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander slot See Figure 113 on page 335 and Figure 114 on page 336 to make sure that you insert the Voice Gateway Media Card in the correct slot Note See your installation worksheet provided by your Planning and Engineering group for the correct slot for the Voice Gateway Media Cards Figure 113 shows the circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway Figure 113 Media Gateway card slot location Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 SSC 553 CSE9025 Figure 114 on page 336 shows the circuit card assignments in the Media Gateway Expander Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 336 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Figure 114 Media Gateway Expander card slot location Slot 7 553 CSE9032 Table 40 on page 337 shows the TN assignments for the MG 1000E Communication Server 1000 Release 4 5 supports up to 30 MG 1000E 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007
158. e 185 of 488 9 Configure the Signaling Server as Leader or Follower See Figure 62 e If there is not already a Leader Signaling Server in the IP Telephony node or if the Signaling Server is to be a stand alone Signaling Server enter a at the prompt to configure this Signaling Server as Leader e If there is already a Leader Signaling Server in the IP Telephony node enter b at the prompt to set this Signaling Server as Follower Then go to step 13 on page 189 For more information about Leader and Follower Signaling Servers see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Figure 62 Leader Follower Signaling Server configuration CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Note This step will over write all existing configuration parameters on this Signaling Server Please select the role of this Signaling Server If this Signaling Server will be a Leader then its data networking and IP Telephony parameters must be entered now This will pre configure the IP Telephony node files If this Signaling Server will be a Follower then its data networking and IP Telephony parameters must be configured through Element Manager later Please enter lt a gt Set this Signaling Server as a Leader lt b gt Set this Signaling Server as a Follower lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 186 of 488 Installing
159. e 2 0 Mbit DTI circuit card NTAK10 2 0 Mbit PRI circuit card NTAK79 and 2 0 Mbit PRI circuit card NTBKSO use the NTBKO5 cable e Each IPE card slot equipped with a Line or Trunk card requires a 25 pair cable from the host Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander e Four conductors for the AUX cable from the Media Gateway e One 25 pair cable from each Power Fail Transfer Unit PFTU QUA6 e Wiring from telephones and trunks DANGER Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never touch uninsulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface Installing a BIX cross connect terminal Procedure 89 describes how to install a BIX cross connect terminal For detailed information refer to the Nordex BIX documentation Procedure 89 Installing a BIX cross connect terminal 1 Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to place the cross connect terminal 2 Lay out the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 122 on page 355 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Page 355 of 488 3 Attach labels on the cross connect terminal to indicate the terminal blocks assigned to the following e 25 pair cables from the system e AUX wiring e PFTUs e Telephones and consoles e Trunks e Miscellaneous equipment Figure 122 Typical BIX cross connect terminal layout Media Gateway OON Cable Caroi TTT OOE Cable Card2 ETT COREE cable Ca
160. e 2050 application to show it as an audio device option during the installation If the USB Headset Kit is 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 437 of 488 installed you can still choose it as the audio device from the Configuration Utility Procedure 112 Installing the USB Headset Kit 1 Connect the coiled lower cord to the headset cord with the Quick Disconnect connector Ensure the Quick Disconnect is securely fastened 2 Connect the headset cord to the RJ9 jack on the adaptor 3 Connect the USB cable to the headset adaptor and to one of the USB jacks at the back of your PC or USB hub End of Procedure The first time the headset adapter is plugged in there is a delay while Windows configures the device and locates appropriate driver software During the installation you can be prompted to supply the original Windows CD ROM so that Windows can locate the required drivers Installing the IP Softphone 2050 application Procedure 113 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC 1 Insert the CD ROM disk into the CD ROM drive of your PC Note Installation should proceed automatically If it does not then continue with step 1 Otherwise go directly to step 5 On the PC desktop double click the My Computer icon Double click the CD icon Double click the Setup icon Follow the prompts that appear on the screen O a fF O N Run the IP Softphone 2050 Configuration Utility t
161. e 4 5 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 30 of 488 About this document software For more information on legacy products and releases click the Technical Documentation link under Support amp Training on the Nortel home page www nortel com Applicable systems This document applies to the Communication Server 1000E CS 1000E system Conventions In this document the CS 1000E system is referred to generically as system Note When upgrading software memory upgrades may be required on the Signaling Server the Call Server or both 3 Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document NTPs The following NTPs are referenced in this document Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Configuration 553 3001 201 Circuit Card Description and Installation 553 3001 211 IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 ISDN Basic Rate Interface Installation and Configuration 553 3001 218 Features and Services 553 3001 306 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 About this document Page 31 of 488 e Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 e Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 e IP Line Descriptio
162. e 86 to disable a Voice Gateway Media Card unit in Element Manager Procedure 86 Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 119 on page 344 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 2 Select Select by Functionality The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 3 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in Figure 120 on page 345 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 349 of 488 The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 Select the DISU Disable unit command from the Unit Commands drop down list Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box Click Submit to the right of the text box The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page End of Procedure Enabling a card Follow Procedure 87 to enable a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager Procedure 87 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in
163. e Login Name option ooo sc euaes wae i raseasodedeas 201 Configuring login IDs and passwords 0 0000 202 Enabling the multi user opon 2 44s00 2000054 eoeseeuvdaree wa 206 Configuring pseudo terminals PTYs 0 0 0 0 000 207 Checkwic PEY stu cc cabs ctache copes ou Veo tioni ee eeu ee 209 Configuring Virtual Tone and Conference Circuits 210 Configuring the MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zones 211 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Contents Page 9 of 488 Contouring the MG IQ00E ports c sss a caseseeeene cee wn ds we 213 Conmeuring Digitone Receivers iacccoasde den eaeesee oie end anes 214 Contigurins Tone Deeciors lt c54 ss2ac egaseSederndsaaber anes 215 Logging in to Element Manager ci accc nase eedoe ee soa aeueds 216 Importing preconfigured IP telephony files 2 4 6 008cce0000 219 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files 221 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node 221 PFertorming A Gstedw pis sicko dt die weynted kaei enkon nat be aes 221 Configuring a Small System Controller 225 e iis ctr eee he eee eons hagas koe ike eine eee 225 TNeCUCION seasea inode Lhe beewee see ddanawdsed dared 225 Adding a software daughterboard and remote security device 226 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard dual port 227 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port 231 Installing so
164. e components 420 Configuring the IP Phone boot parameters 424 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration 425 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters 428 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters 430 Using Set Based Unstallanon vice ciseeord tees teenie gine 433 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 06 60 64e0rsarees crew wer ars 435 Ventying IP Phone tunctionalty yc ca tsrornie ci skencavan bons 439 Displaying registered IP Phonetic cos eee nceeiass initaneti 439 Upgrading TtiwWare so ccuacngiei aye se eiadeuiedeewes eee eRe 439 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Introduction Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 396 of 488 The following IP Phones can be installed on a CS 1000E system Nortel IP Phone 2001 Nortel IP Phone 2002 Nortel IP Phone 2004 Nortel IP Softphone 2050 Nortel IP Phone 2007 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 WLAN Handsets 2210 221 1 2212 MVC 2050 The system must be configured before the IP phones can be installed The configuration includes The IP Phone TN blocks must be defined on the Call Server See Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones on page 408 or Using Set Based Installation on page 433 The IP Phones are assigned to an IP telephony node and use the IP telephony node properties defined using Element Manager see Configuring an IP
165. e ee ek ee ee ee ee eee 133 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 8 of 488 Contents Connecting an MG 1000T Core to a Survivable MG 1G00T Expansion 25 0 s0sces Quwiw aver ar qeeavets esses 156 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet 161 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet 162 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 163 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter onto a Media Card oi sisk de aveeorsiswddeeedeaaaares 163 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN 0000 165 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 166 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 166 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server SONWANE bs kes bd edeE eee dei eewedasoe eee en 169 CODING lt ha Kitt egi cba tkeeiereddsebadwsrsdoreaddoseennss 169 DNS ted rehearse tabbed iObetedentedbesoaeekaeere 169 Signaling Server Software Install Tool 00 169 Installing the solate os oe kc ce iowa Soe ek aweletowee Mowee Kass 172 Logeing in to the Signaling Servet c50cs000ce00000000006 0005 195 Verifying a successful configuration 2 2 500sss60sceasuss 197 Testing the Leader Signaling Server cecss cesses eesesw sane 197 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server 199 CONICS 64 ncn oO 4e elie be4 eee ear sieryreettscedees 199 iced tt i es ee ee es ee 200 Enabling th
166. e the alignment pin on the SSC Insert the alignment pin into the appropriate hole on the daughterboard c Secure the 100BaseT daughterboard dual port using metal screw downs on the SSC d Route the NTDUO606 Ethernet cable s through the plastic guides on the SSC Figure 82 on page 230 shows an SSC with two 100BaseT Daughterboards dual port Install the SSC in a Media Gateway Connect each labeled Ethernet cable to the corresponding port number bulkhead connectors CAUTION Reinstall the front cover End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 230 of 488 Configuring a Small System Controller Figure 82 SSC with two 100BaseT Daughterboards dual port LED cables 4 Red Black Y ellow NTDK57AA A PES anpe IE i NT_STD a a d A Security Device NTM400 Software daughterboard Sree errr rritea ret NTDK83 dual port Factory installed 100BaseT daughterboard 1 NTDK83 dual port Optional 100BaseT daughterboard 2 NTDUO606 Ethernet cables 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a Small System Controller Page 231 of 488 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port Follow Procedure 58 to add a 100BaseT daughterboard single port to a SSC for MG 1000T 1 to 4 Note The NTDK99 is only used in an MG 1000T Procedure 58 Adding a 100BaseT daughterboard single port to an SSC CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Static electricity ca
167. e three ports not used for any CS 1000E system function Do not plug any device into these ports See Figure 5 on page 49 CAUTION Service Interruption Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I O panel DB 9 male serial maintenance port at the same time For detailed information about the Signaling Server refer to Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 48 of 488 System components Figure 4 Connectors on the front of the Signaling Server b PWR INI RST 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Figure 5 System components Page 49 of 488 Connectors at the back of the Signaling Server Universal AC power cord connector Media Card The Media Card described in Table 3 and shown in Figure 6 connects an IP and circuit switched device using Digital Signal Processors DSPs for either line or trunk applications The DSPs enabled by a Voice Gateway application performs media transcoding between IP voice packets and circuit switched devices The Media Card also provides echo cancellation and compression decompression of voice streams Table 3 Media Card profile Part 1 of 2 Property Description Product Code NTDU41DA Media Card 32 Port IP Line 3 1 Voice Gateway NTDU41DB Media Card
168. e typically used for Media Cards or IPE cards that do not require Clock Controller support Voice and signaling connections between an MG 1000T and a CS 1000E use MCDN and IP Peer Networking through their associated Signaling Server The network used to transport these connections can be engineered so that the gateways can be located anywhere in a QoS managed IP network following the engineering guidelines for IP Peer Networking For additional information refer to IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 A Signaling Server provides the software used to provide IP Peer Networking features between the MG 1000T and the network The number of Signaling Servers required will depend upon the capacity and level of redundancy required For additional information refer to Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 Figure 37 on page 155 is an example of an IP Phone call through an MG 1000T to the PSTN 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 155 of 488 Figure 37 MG 1000T Media Gateway operation 2 3 4 MG 1000T Signaling Server SS MG 1000T Core ebbbbELD S Network Redirect 3 6 9 Server NRS Signaling Server am GW SS Call Server 0 CSO MG 1000T MG 1000T Example PRI call to IP Phone Incoming ISDN D Channel DID message to MG 1000T MG 1000T Core converts to CDP call to Virtual Trunk SS MG 1000T SS requests
169. ected over a LAN Nortel recommends that you set the timer to a low value to minimize service interruption End of Procedure Printing Survivable MG 1000T Expansion parameters The following Print commands available in LD 117 print the MG 1000T Expansion parameters and Survivability for all or specified Survivable MG 1000T Expansion PRT SURV cab Where cab 1 to 4 MG 1000T Expansion PRT CAB cab Where cab 1 to 4 MG 1000T Expansion Configuring Alternate primary controller Procedure 120 Configuring the IP telephony node for Alternate primary controller 1 2 Log in to Element Manager if you are not already logged in Select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Configuration from the navigator The Node Configuration web page opens as shown in Figure 99 on page 322 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 474 of 488 553 304 1 210 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller 3 Click Edit next to the desired node The Edit web page opens as shown in Figure 100 on page 323 4 Click LAN configuration The LAN configuration menu expands see Figure 159 on page 474 Figure 159 LAN configuration Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Confiquration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Edit Edit Save and Transfer Cancel Node SNMP VGW and IP phone codec profile 00S LAN configuration
170. ed as function keys Any printout of the TN block will not show key 7 because it is a local function key On the M2616 if CLS HFA key 15 on the voice TN defaults to the Handsfree key No other feature assignment is accepted Primary and secondary data DNs must be unique A station SCR SCN MCR or MCN DN must be removed as a member from all Group Hunt lists before the DN can be modified Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 415 of 488 Table 53 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 4 of 4 Response Description On the M3903 keys 4 15 are blocked No feature assignment is accepted for keys 2 15 On the M3903 M3904 and M3905 keys 29 31 are reserved No feature assignment is accepted for keys 29 31 other than NUL On M3904 no feature assignment is accepted for keys 12 15 On M3905 the technician can assign NUL or a server application on key 5 On key 6 the craftsperson can assign NUL or a local application On M3905 the technician can assign NUL or the program key on key 7 On M3905 the technician can assign AAG AMG ASP DWC EMR MSB or NRD on keys 8 11 Other features are blocked For IP Phones xx Keys 0 5 and 6 11 using Shift key These are self labeled physical keys that can be programmed with any feature Note 1 The IP Phone 2002 does not have a Shift key Only keys 0 3 can be programmed Note 2 Keys 16 26 are r
171. ed in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Nortel Nortel Logo the Globemark SL 1 Meridian 1 and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks Publication number 553 3041 210 Document release Standard 4 00 Date September 2007 Produced in Canada To provide feedback or report a problem in this document go to www nortel com documentfeedback NORTEL
172. ed on the primary controller The technician is then prompted with a confirmation request If lt YES gt the command is performed on all Survivable MG 1000T Expansions As with the database download operation preliminary security checks are performed by the primary controller against the Survivable MG 1000T Expansions security ID and software release If these security checks fail for any MG 1000T Expansion synchronization is aborted for that MG 1000T Expansion SWP command The SWP command is used to swap the regular and bak copies of the database on the primary flash drive It restores the database to the state prior to the most recent datadump Figure 156 on page 469 illustrates the operation of the SWP command Only one MG 1000T Expansion is shown for illustration purposes RES and RIB commands The RES command restores data from the MG 1000T Core s external PC Card drive to its c drive and all Survivable MG 1000T Expansions c drives The RES command is illustrated in Figure 157 on page 470 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 468 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller The RIB command restores data from the MG 1000T Core s internal backup flash drive to its c drive and from the Survivable MG 1000T Expansions internal backup flash drive to the c drive The RIB command is illustrated in Figure 158 on page 471 Only one MG 1000
173. edure 15 Connecting an MG 1000E in the Dual Homed configuration 1 Connect logical port 2 of the MG 1000E 100BaseT daughterboard 2 to the bulkhead connector 2 Connect the 100BaseT Port 2 at the back of the Media Gateway to a second BayStack 470 For CS 1000E systems it is recommended that there be no single point of failure for the data network For information on engineering the data network refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 End of Procedure Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet Follow Procedure 16 to connect a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet Procedure 16 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN 1 Connect one end of a standard CAT5 cable to the ELAN network interface bottom at the back of the Signaling Server as shown in Figure 33 on page 112 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 cable to an RJ 45 ELAN subnet port on the ELAN Layer 2 switch BayStack 470 24T Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 112 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components Figure 33 Signaling Server ELAN subnet and TLAN subnet connectors TLAN ELAN End of Procedure Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet Follow Procedure 17 to connect a Signaling Server to the TLAN Procedure 17 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 1 Connect a standard CAT5 cable to the TLAN network interface top RJ 45 jack at the back of the Signaling S
174. efault licence parameter for survivability enables one MG 1000T Expansion to be configured as survivable 1 Ensure the link is up between the MG 1000T Core and the MG 1000T Expansion Ensure that the Survivability ISM is set on the system for each MG 1000T Expansion that is to be configured as survivable Configure the Survivability SURV capability Each MG 1000T Expansion must be separately configured to be survivable The SURV command is configured in LD 117 CHG SURV lt cab gt lt Survival setting gt e cab 1 4 MG 1000T Expansion e Survival setting NO YES Configure the Automatic Switchback parameter The Automatic Switchback AUTOSB option enables a Survivable MG 1000T Expansion to switchback from Survival Mode to Normal Mode automatically as soon as the IP link with the MG 1000T Core is restored and the SWOTO expires The AUTOSB command is configured in LD 117 CHG AUTOSB lt cab gt lt Switchback setting gt e cab 1 4 MG 1000T Expansion e Switchback setting YES NO 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 473 of 488 5 Configure the SWOTO Configure the SWOTO separately for each MG 1000T Expansion The SwoTo command is configured in LD 117 CHG SWOTO lt cab gt lt value gt e cab 1 4 MG 1000T Expansion e value 2 120 600 seconds For point to point connection MG 1000T Expansions that are not conn
175. efore a CS 1000E system can be installed a network assessment must be performed and the network must be VoIP ready If the minimum VoIP network requirements are not met the system will not operate properly For information on the minimum VoIP network requirements and converging a data network with VoIP refer to Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 Before undertaking the installation review the chapter entitled Safety instructions on page 33 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 38 of 488 Installation summary See System components on page 41 to review the profiles of the key system components For information on the models of telephones compatible with the CS 1000E system see Telephones on page 71 Installation tasks Table 1 lists the tasks involved with the installation of a CS 1000E system Table 1 List of required installation tasks Part 1 of 2 Rack mounting the components Installing system grounds Connecting CS 1000E system components Installing software on the CS 1000E Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Configuring a terminal and SDI ports Connecting a Terminal Server Configuring a Small System Controller Configuring the MG 1000E ports Verifying the netw
176. epts this response if it i2004 is equipped with packages 88 and 170 i2050 Terminal Number Format for CS 1000E where 0 4 8 252 superloop number in multiples of 4 s 0 1 MG 1000E on superloop c 1 4 7 10 u 0 31 see Table 64 on page 485 Format for MG 1000T where c 0 4 7 10 11 14 17 24 27 34 37 44 47 50 u 0 31 Office Data Administration System Station Designator Customer number as defined in LD 15 Zone number to which this IP Phone belongs Class of Service ADD Automatic Digit Display default for IP Phone For a complete list of responses refer to Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 31 1 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Table 53 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 413 of 488 LD 11 Configure an IP Phone Part 2 of 4 Response xx aaa yyyy cccc Description or D zz z Telephone function key assignments The following key assignments determine calling options and features available to a telephone Note that KEY is prompted until just a carriage return lt CR gt is entered xx key number aaa key name or function yyyy additional information required for the key zz Z additional information required for the key aaa The cccc or D entry deals specifically with the Calling Line identification feature Where cccc CLID table entry of 0 N where N the value entered at the SIZE prompt in LD 1
177. er a DN and press Listen for a relocation tone The system response displayed on the IP Phone is as follows OK Replace the handset The set displays the logo the date and time and the DN keys The set based installation is complete End of Procedure Installing the IP Softphone 2050 This chapter contains the following procedures Procedure 111 Configuring the IP Softphone 2050 on page 436 Procedure 112 Installing the USB Headset Kit on page 437 Procedure 113 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC on page 437 Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time on page 438 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 436 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones Procedure 111 Configuring the IP Softphone 2050 1 Access LD 11 Enter the command LD 11 2 Enter appropriate responses shown in Table 55 Table 55 LD 11 Configure the IP Softphone 2050 Response Description Add new data Change existing data Type of data block Terminal number ODAS telephone designator Customer number as defined in LD 15 Zone number Flexible CFNA DN Class of service HFA Digital Telephone Handsfree Allowed is default for IP Softphone 2050 to enable the USB interface End of Procedure Installing and configuring on the PC Installing the USB Headset Kit Installing the USB Headset Kit application after the IP Softphone 2050 software application enables the IP Softphon
178. erver as shown in Figure 33 on page 112 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 cable to an RJ 45 TLAN network interface on the data network switch BayStack 470 24T End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 113 of 488 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter onto a Media Card The Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter shown in Figure 34 provides access to the TLAN and ELAN Ethernet Ports The adapter breaks out the signals from the I O connector to the following e ELAN management network interface e TLAN telephony network interface e one RS 232 local console port Figure 34 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter TLAN RJ 45 ELAN RuJ 45 RS 232 Connector LAN socket LAN socket Voice Gateway Media Card maintenance port Identification Label 50 pin connector Procedure 18 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card 1 Open the Media Card package NTDU41CA 2 Remove the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 114 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components 3 Save the other items from the package for use in Installing a CompactFlash on page 330 4 Insert the adapter shown in Figure 34 into the connector Card 1 Card 2 Card 3 or Card 4 that corresponds to the location of the Media Card For example
179. eserved for dedicated IP Phone soft keys Table 54 on page 416 lists the dedicated IP Phone key name values aaa Other key name values can be found in Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 416 of 488 3 Configure the dedicated soft keys as shown in Table 54 Table 54 IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment Part 1 of 2 IP Phone key number Response s Allowed MWK NUL MWK Message Waiting key TRN NUL TRN Call Transfer key A03 or A06 NUL AOS 3 party conference key AO6 6 party conference key CFW NUL CFW Call Forward key RGA NUL RGA Ring Again key PRK NUL PRK Call Park key RNP NUL RNP Ringing Number pickup key SCU Speed Call User SSU System Speed Call User SCC Speed Call Controller SSC System Speed Call Controller NUL PRS NUL PRS Privacy Release key Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 417 of 488 Table 54 IP Phone dedicated soft key assignment Part 2 of 2 IP Phone key number Response s Allowed CHG NUL CHG Charge Account key CPN NUL CPN Calling Party Number key 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each IP Phone End of Procedure Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer passwords
180. eters are correct enter y c Goto Step 12 9 Configure the IP for the CS 1000E to Media Gateway link network manually a Enter 2 System response Enter Media Gateway New IP Parameters Media Gateway IP X X xX x Call Server IP KXXX Media Gateway NetMask Han lt i gt ceo a Layer 2 configuration System response L2 Configuration Media Gateway Router 0 0 0 0 10 Enter the Media Gateway Router IP for a layer 3 configuration a Enter router parameter System response Media Gateway New IP Parameters Media Gateway IP HEE gt lt b oa 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Page 249 of 488 Call Server IP PEK KE Media Gateway NetMask 1 KIRK Media Gateway Router eK Is this correct y n a bort _ 11 Confirm the IP configuration a If correct enter y System response Select M3900 Language Set 1 Global 10 languages 2 Western Europe 10 languages 3 Eastern Europe 10 languages 4 North America 6 languages 5 6 Spare Group A Spare Group B q uit p revious m ain menu h elp or lt cr gt redisplay Enter Selection _ 12 Select the M3900 Language Set same as on CS 1000E a Enter 1 System response Copying new PSDL Copying new PSDL Copying loadware files Copying language files Copying FIJI files Detected change in system type Pkg 298 299 Detected change in machine type
181. ets End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 344 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Procedure 83 Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 119 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 Figure 119 Maintenance by Overlay web page Managing 207 179 153 99 System Maintenance Maintenance Select by Overlay Select by Functionality lt Select by Overlay LD 30 Network and Signaling LD 32 Network and Peripheral Equipment LD 34 Tone and Digit Switch LD 36 Trunk LD 37 InputOutput LD 39 Intergroup Switch and System Clock LD 45 Background Signaling and Switching LD 46 Multifrequency Sender LD 48 Link LD 54 Multifrequency Signaling LD 60 Digital Trunk Interface and Primary Rate Interface LD 75 Digital Trunk LD 80 Call Trace LD 96 D Channel LD 117 Ethernet and Alarm Management LD 135 Core Common Equipment LD 137 Core InputfOutput 2 Select Select by Functionality The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Figure 120
182. eway profile Part 2 of 3 Property Description Power status indicator Nortel logo is located on the unit faceplate Power cord connector is located on the right rear when viewed from the front Power On Off switch is located behind the faceplate See Figure 8 on page 56 Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable Unit is AC powered 100 240 VAC DC is not supported Cooling Forced air cooling with side to side air flow The fans are temperature controlled The fans run at a reduced speed at room temperature Ensure that equipment ventilation openings are not blocked Card slots Four usable universal card slots 1 to 4 Slot 0 is dedicated to the NTDK20FA or later SSC Slots 1 to 4 support Digital Line cards maximum four Analog Line cards maximum four Analog Trunk cards maximum four Digital Trunk cards maximum four Note Each MG 1000T with digital trunks must have a clock controller Media Cards maximum four Application cards maximum four Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 54 of 488 System components Table 4 Media Gateway profile Part 3 of 3 Property Description Connectors The 25 pair cable connectors at the back panel rear see Figure 7 on page 52 provide access to the cross connect terminal Main Distribution Frame The AUX port connects a Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU to the Media
183. ff Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 64 of 488 System components Note PTY ports are software ports and will not work until the system has completed its INI or SYSLOAD These ports cannot be used by a SEB to track INI SYSLOAD faults as they will not be able to see these issues If you wish to capture these messages using an SEB it is recommended that it be connected to a TTY port such as Port 0 which displays SYS INI messages The Terminal Server is configured to automatically log in to the active Core Call Server upon start up It always connects to the Active CPU IP address The CS 1000E can configure up to 16 serial ports for applications within the configuration Data Block Ports can be configured by using login userid of PTYnn TTY ports are specified where nn is the PTY port number configured for a particular TTY within LD 17 If a PTYnn userid is specified and that port is busy because of another login an error message will be produced on the maintenance consoles in the report log or as SNMP alarms no userid or the OTM userid the highest available PTY port number is selected The Terminal Server has the following attributes support rlogin protocol on local access mode support transparent or binary mode on rlogin connection support port speed up to 115kbps support auto rlogin connection and auto retry after being disconnected support BOOTP support DHCP 553
184. figuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database You must configure the following data when setting up a CS 1000E IP network 1 Configure the Virtual Trunk routes using Element Manager or the Command Line Interface LD 16 Configure the Route Data Blocks and associate the Virtual Trunk routes with the IP network by configuring the following parameters a route information b network management information for example Access Restrictions c bandwidth zone d Signaling Server host name for the route e protocol identifier f associated Node ID 2 Configure the Virtual Trunks using Element Manager or the Command Line Interface LD 14 3 Configure the network routing within the CS 1000E a Use existing tools to configure networking features such as routing calls based on digits dialed b Configure dialing plan information for calls that must be routed to circuit switched trunks for example PSTN interfaces You can route these calls using a feature such as Network Alternate Route Selection NARS Configure Virtual Trunk routes in NARS the same way as traditional trunks 4 Configure the Primary Alternate and Failsafe Gatekeepers at installation and initial setup 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 5 Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database Page 487 of 488 Configure the Gatekeeper database to provide a central database of addresses that are required to route calls across
185. flowchart shaded boxes for those features and options beyond the scope of this guide Procedure 1 Configuring the basic system Use the overlays to configure basic system features offered by the CS 1000E 1 Complete the configuration using the overlays in the order shown in Figure 160 on page 481 Figure 161 on page 482 and Figure 162 on page 483 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 479 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration Data entry sequence for new systems Figure 1 o90V ESS s6 d1 Aedsiq wey Aued Buje old uoyd j L edf1 008z 008 Boreuy 9z aql 901g qunisiq eyeq oy JON 0G LL aT 6t al elal zt al uoyd j L yoolg J N 0 H josuo9 resia uogouus y poo f uoys a yuepusny std yoo g eyeq sewoj sno z6 al Z puoodey uoeinByuog Z4tq1 prooay uoleunByuoDg Installation and Configuration Communication Server 1000E S61L LOOE ESS L8L LOZZ ESS ZZ0 L00 8 E S9S WSAS dso duls 90e b008 ess 90 L00e ess f 90s Loos ess 1e1 L00e ess rer roos ess AdX juewdinby aLa ata alg d1OX dsns jesoyduied papue xy sdoojedns Basic system telephony configuration Page 480 of 488 Configuration Record Figure 2 z6 q1 Z plooay uonenGyuog SYA Z8L LOZZ 9S 8H LOZZ SS LLS L008 SS SON EA 8 JOSHO NYLY Wav 1Vv TAO WdVd noa aMd NVaV Aeman S1 J WLIed WA SAS yu wdinbg uowwog puomssed SE9IN9q O I Akan puooey uolesnByuo9
186. for no change Where lt xxxx gt new PWD1 password 7 Enter the command LOGIN_NAME lt xxxx gt Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 204 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server 10 11 12 13 OR lt cr gt for no change Where lt xxxx gt new PWD1 login name Enter the command NPW2 lt XXXX gt OR lt cr gt for no change Where lt xxxx gt new PWD2 password Enter the command LOGIN_NAME lt xxxx gt OR lt cr gt for no change Where lt xxxx gt new PWD2 login name Enter the command LAPW lt nn gt Where lt nn gt new or changed LAPW password number 0 99 Enter the command PWTP ovly Enter the command PWnn lt xxxx gt Where lt xxxx gt LAPW nn password Enter the command LOGIN_NAME lt xxxx gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 14 15 16 17 18 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 205 of 488 Where lt xxxx gt LAPW nn login name Enter the command OVLA lt xx gt Where lt xx gt al1 or the list of overlays allowed Enter the command CUST lt xx gt Where lt xx gt al1 or the list of customers allowed Enter the command MAT YES Enter the command MAT_READ_ONLY NO System response MEM AVAIL U P 1015893 USED U P 138773 24981 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16
187. from 0 to 33 Deleting files in directory u db hi Installed BOOTROM p load main_bt Communication Server 1000 Software Rls 4 5 will be installed Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 250 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller WARNING A system restart will be invoked as part of the software installation process Are you sure you wish to perform the installation y n a bort _ 13 Perform the installation a Enter y System response if software installation successful Installation completed successfully The system then reboots Rebooting Once the installation program completes messages appear on the terminal screen When the message INIXXx appears the system is operational End of Procedure Setting the system time and date Follow Procedure 61 to set the system time and date You can also use Element Manager or OTM Procedure 61 Setting system time and date Log in to the CS 1000E 1 a Enter the command LOGI System response PASS Enter the default password 0000 Access LD 2 Enter the command LD 2 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Page 251 of 488 3 Set the time and date Enter the command STAD lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt Where lt day gt the day of the month 1 31 lt mont
188. ftware on an MG 1000E Small System Controller 00006 235 a e 1a este ie haga theedabna kona TE E E TEE 235 POUCO sg ii ecw eRtigdv etd eeew een ew deed ee SE 235 Installing software on an MG 1O00E SSC 0 000 236 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller 2 02 2005 241 CODING co 4c aoe T OT EE AETIA EET ANETT T ETET 241 Tntoducioii seere r E REA ERR 241 Software Installation Progam s si ces cea ea deen gece ceiareawaoaa 242 Reyes ic ia lers pad paneer oddciedsdeeddcwerbendenengeaas 244 Installing software onan SSC oc occa ce ss cees sen eoe beens s dene es 245 meting the system time and date cnc cskanceeeedsega ierik tpaa 250 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 10 of 488 Contents Connecting a Terminal Server 253 Ol ae ee ae eee ree eee ee ee ee eee ee 253 Titou H l evee tantet A AARAA TERR A 233 Configuring a Terminal Servet i ccs 0 2ese nse ba eevewadionenens 255 Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port 258 Telnet CS 1000E COM post froma PCs c y 4 eee eeies eee toawwws 258 Configuring a transparent rlogin port 0 00 00 0 00 260 Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on board modem 264 CS 1000E COM port YPES vic cc4ctiee ges etia bavi ediaes 265 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports 267 NCHS iis ca chee tee eather ieee tan E E E gous 267 DGG ss 2 ke eee ee bedi cbetedghakedee
189. fy that the Call Server is active LD 135 Load program STAT CPU Get the status of the CPUs Check dial tone Verify that the Call Server is active redundant and single Make internal external and network calls Check attendant console activity Check IP Peer networking for incoming and outgoing calls Check applications CallPilot Symposium and so on End of Procedure Install the software on the second Call Server Procedure 27 Installing the software on the second Call Server 1 Attach the LAN 1 and LAN 2 cables to the CP PIV faceplate connectors between the Call Servers Complete procedures 22 through 27 for the second Call Server Each Call Server can be named Call Server 1 and Call Server 0 Note Do not install LAN 1 and LAN 2 cables at this time End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 142 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E Verifying Call Server 0 is active Use the following commands to verify that Call Server 0 is active LD 135 Load program STAT CPU Get the status of the CPUs CFN Make the system redundant At this point Core Net 0 is ready to be synchronized with Core Net 1 Procedure 28 Making the system redundant 1 Check to see if the LAN 1 and LAN 2 cables are attached If not attach the LAN 1 and LAN 2 cables to the CP PIV faceplate connectors on Call Server 0 and Call Server 1 2 Once the synchronization of memories and drives is comp
190. g CS 1000E system components This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 12 Connecting co located Call Servers on page 105 e Procedure 13 Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers on page 106 e Procedure 14 Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1000E on page 107 e Procedure 16 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN on page 111 e Procedure 17 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet on page 112 e Procedure 18 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on to a Media Card on page 113 e Procedure 19 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet on page 114 e Procedure 20 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet on page 115 e Procedure 21 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion on page 116 Connecting Call Server 0 to Call Server 1 The CS 1000E redundant architecture allows for the separation of Call Server 0 and Call Server 1 The two processors are connected by either a direct 100BaseT crossover cable or a carefully engineered Layer 2 VLAN infrastructure Campus Redundancy provides the ability to separate the CS 1000E Call Servers in a campus environment for campus mirroring This feature enables two Call Servers one active and one redundant to be connected through an Ethernet network interface Campus Redundancy can operate using any vendor s Layer 2 switching products in addition to the BayStack 470 The distance depends
191. g the Main Distribution Frame Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics Inrod ctoi ss hen G id oo Soke e GRE eed ReRDER SERRE REED EAS SWS 353 Terminal Block reguiremenis vnc vio eSeisaa bees teniri ia 354 Installing a BIX cross connect terminal 005 354 Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK 356 Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways 360 This chapter describes how to install and connect a CS 1000E system using the BIX or Krone Test Jack Frame UK cross connect terminals This chapter contains the following procedures 1 Procedure 89 Installing a BIX cross connect terminal on page 354 2 Procedure 90 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK on page 358 3 Procedure 91 Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways on page 360 Note The use of the BIX system is not mandatory however it is the recommended option Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 354 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Terminal block requirements The cross connect terminal requires enough connecting blocks to terminate up to four 25 pair cables for each Media Gateway and each Media Gateway Expander When Ethernet connections are used instead of traditional cabling the Media Card Input Output adapter is used e For the 1 5 Mbit DTI PRI circuit card NTRB21 use the NTBK04 cable e For th
192. ge 98 e Procedure 11 Grounding equipment in the UK on page 101 Refer to your grounding plan for additional information WARNING Correct grounding is very important Failure to complete the grounding procedures could result in a system that is unsafe for the personnel using the equipment CAUTION Service Interruption If your system is not grounded correctly it cannot be protected from lightning or power surges and it could be subject to service interruptions You must use insulated ground wire for system grounding CAUTION Service Interruption To prevent ground loops power all equipment from the same dedicated electrical panel Installing a ground bar Install the NTBK80 Ground Bar for up to six Media Gateways with their Expander Install the NTDU6201 Ground Bar for up to 35 ground connections Reference to ground bar in this NTP refers to either the NTBK80 or the NTDU6201 Ground Bar 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing system grounds Page 93 of 488 Follow Procedure 6 to install a ground bar Procedure 6 Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar 1 Place the ground bar near the equipment Note The ground bar is a bridging point for ground wires from up to six components 2 Connect the ground bar to the ground bus in the AC electrical panel using 6 AWG wire See Table 12 on page 93 for region specific grounding requirements WARNING A qualified technician or electrician must make the co
193. ge changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in Figure 120 on page 345 The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 Select the ENLU Enable unit command from the Unit Commands drop down list Enter the card number and unit number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box Click Submit to the right of the text box The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 351 of 488 Verifying functionality You can now use the Voice Gateway Media Card to transcode voice data between IP and TDM To test the voice gateway channels DSPs perform a variety of analog or digital calls to IP Phones and vice versa Note You require analog or digital telephones or trunks to perform this test Upgrading loadware Refer to Communication Server 1OOOE Upgrade Procedures 553 3041 258 to check for the latest Voice Gateway Media Card loadware version and how to upgrade to the latest Voice Gateway Media Card loadware Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 352 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 353 of 488 Installin
194. ger iicccscaceeicaanseeaweareaanas 350 Procedure 89 Installing a BIX cross connect terminal 354 Procedure 90 Installing the Krone Test Jack Frame UK 358 Procedure 91 Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways 360 Procedure 92 Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer 367 Procedure 93 Logging in to Element Manager 370 Procedure 94 Importing an existing node 00eee eens 372 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 List of Procedures Page 25 of 488 Procedure 95 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration 000cc ee ee ener eeaee 374 Procedure 96 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to the IP telephony node in Element Manager 379 Procedure 97 Performing a datadump using Element Manager 380 Procedure 98 Cross connecting telephones 0 40 5 386 Procedure 99 Connecting a telephone without a PFTU 389 Procedure 100 Connecting an off premise telephone 390 Procedure 101 Connecting an attendant console 391 Procedure 102 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones using the CLI lt u coscenccceeeerscenserctesrsiceess 408 Procedure 103 Configuring virtual superloops 5 410 Procedure 104 Configuring the IP Phones 0 0eeseeeee 411 Procedure 105 Setting passwords for the administrator and temporary IP Telephone Instal
195. guration Page 404 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 405 of 488 Table 49 WLAN Handset component list Part 3 of 4 WLAN Application Gateway 2246 64 users 128 users 256 users 512 users 1 024 users 10 000 users WLAN Handset 2210 Desktop Charger WLAN Handset 2211 Desktop Charger WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 WLAN Application Gateway 2246 64 users WLAN Application Gateway 2246 128 users WLAN Application Gateway 2246 256 users WLAN Application Gateway 2246 512 users WLAN Application Gateway 2246 1024 users WLAN Application Gateway 2246 10 000 users The following items must be ordered with the applicable power supply NTTQ65AB N0023211 NTTQ65BA A054897 1 NTTQ65CA A0548972 NTTQ65DA A0548973 NTTQ65EA A0548974 NTTQ65FA A0548975 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 406 of 488 Table 49 WLAN Handset component list Part 4 of 4 Power supplies WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger e North America NTTQ4301 A0548951 e Europe NTTQ4311 A0548952 e UK HK NTTQ4321 A0548953 e Switzerland NTTQ4331 A0548954 e Australia New Zealand NTTQ4341 A0548955 e Mexico NTTQ4351 WLAN Handset 2210 2211 Charger amp WLAN Application Gateway See NTTQ4101 A0548499 gt None mienies NTTQ4111 A0548956 Eureee NTTQ4121 A0548958 a NTTQ4131 A0548959 pcowiizetand NTTQ4141 A0548960 e Australia New Zealand NTT
196. gure 49 on page 175 press lt CR gt to perform system checks and begin software installation 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 175 of 488 Figure 49 Install Tool banner screen CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx HEEE HEHEHE HEHEHEEH HEHE FHFHHEHFHEHEE HHH EA FHEFHEHEHE EHH HEHEHE HEHE HEHEHE HHE NORTEL NETWORKS HEHEH HEHEH EEEH Communication Server 1000 Software Ht HEHE HEHEHE Copyright 2002 2004 HEHEHE HH HHH HEHEHEH HEEEEHEEEHREEHHEHHRH EEEHREEHREEEEREEHEEEHHH HHETHTHPHEHHEHEHEHEES H se Se HE HE OH OH HEHEHE HOH OH Please press lt CR gt when ready Note If the system has less than 512 MBytes of RAM the following error message appears WARNING Your system has less than 512 MB RAM In order to run Rls 4 software you must upgrade RAM to 512 MB and repeat install Otherwise serious service problems are likely Please enter lt CR gt gt lt q gt Quit lt a gt Accept the possible risks and continue install Press lt CR gt to quit Upgrade to 512 MBytes of RAM and restart the Signaling Server Install Tool again Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 176 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software The system verifies the file systems e When the softwa
197. gure 99 on page 322 click Edit to view the node parameters The Edit web page appears as shown in Figure 100 on page 323 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 375 of 488 Note 1 Clicking Transfer Status displays the Transfer Status web page see Figure 137 on page 378 This sends the node configuration files to all IP Telephony components in the node e f any element within the node fails to transfer either BOOTP or CONFIG files Transfer Status is highlighted in red e Transfer Status is highlighted in yellow if the transfer status of the node elements is unavailable Note 2 Delete is used to delete the corresponding node The node is not automatically deleted A message displays and asks if you are sure you want to delete the node Review the node parameters by opening each tab Note For detailed information on each of the node parameters refer to IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Click Save and Transfer Click OK to save the node configuration to the CS 1000E and transfer the configuration to all elements After a few seconds the Transfer Progress web page opens and displays each of the elements in the node see Figure 134 on page 376 The Voice Gateway Media Cards retrieve the CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files from the CS 1000E A check mark is added to each field as the card receives its CONFIG INI and BOOTP TAB files The sta
198. h card and Retaining Pin from the packaging 2 Locate the CompactFlash socket in the lower left hand corner of the Voice Gateway Media Card see Figure 107 Figure 107 CompactFlash socket on Voice Gateway Media Card 3 Position the CompactFlash card with the label facing up and contact pins toward the socket as shown in Figure 108 Figure 108 Position the CompactFlash in socket 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 333 of 488 4 Insert the CompactFlash card in the socket Press firmly until it is fully seated and the Eject button extends see Figure 109 Figure 109 Insert CompactFlash to extend Eject button Eject button 5 Turn the Voice Gateway Media Card over to view the back of the card Identify the hole for the Retaining Pin The hole labeled a in Figure 110 is located approximately 1 inch 2 5 cm above the lower lock latch and 1 inch 2 5 cm from the card s faceplate Figure 110 Retaining Pin hole 6 Insert the Retaining Pin in this hole labeled 1 in Figure 111 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 334 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Press the Retaining Pin into the hole until the pin clicks as it locks into position labeled 2 in Figure 111 The underside of the head of the Retaining Pin should be flat against the card Figur
199. h gt the month number 1 12 lt year gt the year in four digit or two digit form see Note on page 251 lt hour gt the hour of the day 0 23 lt minute gt the minutes 0 59 lt second gt the seconds 0 59 Sample entry STAD 2 9 2002 16 47 0 4 Print the current time and date Enter the command TTAD Sample system response MON 02 09 2002 14 47 05 Note Except for the year the other entries in the time of day output are two digit numbers The year can be any year from 1901 to 2099 inclusive It can be input as a full four digit field or as a two digit short form The two digit short form is assumed to be in the range 1976 to 2075 and the appropriate addition is made when calculating the day of week and leap years 5 Exit from LD 2 Enter the command kkkk End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 252 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 253 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INGCIMANION soi eae ded Gee eGR Ae eed Eee ORES eESEDERS REA 253 Configuring a Terminal Server esris srrri tirien rone EEA 299 Telnet Terminal Server virtual management port 258 Telnet CS 1000E COM port from a PE ssreccresrrereriererisod 259 Configuring transparent rlogin port ricessi eds teavodia
200. he 50 Volt side of the trunk is connected to the B leg Table 34 NT5K19 2W paging mode terminations Pair color Table 35 NT5K19 2W Type 1 mode terminations Part 1 of 2 Pair color 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 315 of 488 Table 35 NT5K19 2W Type 1 mode terminations Part 2 of 2 Pair color Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 316 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 36 NT5K19 4W Type 1 mode terminations Pair color 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 317 of 488 Table 37 NT5K19 AC15 mode pair terminations Pair color Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 318 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 38 NT5K19 Recorded Announcement mode pair terminations Pair color Verifying trunk functionality You can now use the trunks To test the trunks make trunk calls 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 319 of 488 Contents This section contains information on the following topics rodi ii oc tte oe dae bbgdn swear ehaiwekioswereaaaiews 320 COMMEUININ
201. he customer database on the primary flash drive becomes corrupted Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 244 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Keycodes A security keycode system protects the installation of software feature set and license parameters The keycodes required for a new installation or system upgrade are on the Keycode Data Sheet that is supplied with the software and security device A different keycode is assigned to each site for a particular combination of items such as software release feature set and LICENSES The installation does not continue unless correct keycodes are entered Note If an invalid keycode is entered the software and databases on the present system are not affected Note Contact your support group if the Keycode Data Sheet is missing Keycode rejection The Software Installation Program validates the keycodes If the keycodes are valid then the installation continues If the system rejects the keycodes then ensure that the e correct keycodes have been entered e software is the correct version for the site e feature set data has been entered correctly e License parameter data has been entered correctly If the correct data has been entered and the keycodes are rejected then stop the installation and call the support group IMPORTANT The system limits the validation of keycodes to three consecutive attempts If the thir
202. he BayStack 470 24T ports e VLAN 1 Default All 104 ports belong to the four BayStack 470 24T ports e VLAN 2 HSP Two ports connect CP PIV packs HSP ports in Call Server 0 and Call Server 1 Four high speed fiber uplinks GBIC ports e VLAN 3 ELAN Includes 2 ELAN network interfaces on the Call Servers for example for ELAN connections for Signaling Servers MG 1000Es Call Pilot Symposium OTM Element Manager Four high speed fiber uplinks GBIC ports End of Procedure Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1000E An MG 1000E performs functions under the direct control of the CS 1000E Core Call Server The MG 1000E detects stimulus events from its interface 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 107 of 488 cards and passes these events to the CS 1000E Core Call Server where the high level call processing decisions are made See Figure 29 on page 107 for an example MG 1000E operation Figure 29 MG 1000E operation MG 1000E Example Digital set calls IP Phone 1 Digital set goes off hook off hook message to CS 2 CS tells MG 1000E to provide dial tone to set 3 Digital set presses digit keys messages to CS for each 4 CS tells MG 1000E to play ringback tone to set and allocates DSP dene 5 6 i 8 9 IP phone goes off hook to answer message to SS CS CS tells MG 1000E to connect set to DSP and IP phone CS requests
203. he hard disk test If you select to test the hard disk anyway it will take approximately 14 minutes Please enter lt a gt Skip the hard disk test lt b gt Test the hard disk Enter Choice gt a The following messages display on the screen Testing hard disk Testing partition u 4194241 blocks xxx complete Testing partition p 4194241 blocks xxx complete Hard disk testing succeeded Where xxx 0 to 100 Note If the physical check did not pass contact your technical support group 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 181 of 488 Figure 56 Install Tool Main Menu CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx MAIN MENU The Install Tool will install Signaling Server software and related files You will be prompted throughout the installation Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt To perform a complete installation upgrade Signaling Server s w IP Phone f w Voice Gateway Media Card 1 w basic Signaling Server configuration To install upgrade Signaling Server software only To copy IP Phone firmware only Oo copy Voice Gateway Media Card loadware only To perform basic Signaling Server configuration only To go to the Tools Menu Quit Choice gt 7 Atthe Main Menu Figure 56 enter a to install Signaling Server software Option a performs options b c d and e The fol
204. he manufacturer s instructions to rack mount this equipment Rack mounting a BayStack 460 Power over Ethernet unit Follow the manufacturer s instructions to rack mount this equipment 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 91 of 488 Installing system grounds Contents This section contains information on the following topics Droduch ss i264 h bse oods o MEO LEDERER e LAS EEe PES 91 Iistalling afrond ati 05 os eadeseQn rikere Oer OEE EEA 92 Grounding a CS 1000E Call Serve cic cssversaecar trees aeews 95 Grounding a Signaling Servet sera ircserroteseprurosiiki iteki 95 Grounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel 96 Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels 97 Grounding a Media Gateway Expander 00 0 98 Grounding other rack mounted components 99 Grounding equipment in the UK 3 esse neers Ges enesees deus 101 Introduction This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 6 Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar on page 93 e Procedure 7 Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar on page 94 e Procedure 8 Grounding Media Gateways powered by the same electrical panel on page 96 e Procedure 9 Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels on page 98 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 92 of 488 Installing system grounds e Procedure 10 Grounding a Media Gateway Expander on pa
205. ication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Table 49 WLAN Handset component list Part 2 of 4 WLAN Handset 2211 kit North America NTTQ50AA A0548451 WLAN Handset 2211 kit Global power supply not included NTTQ50BA A0548455 North American kit includes WLAN 2211 Handset NTTQ5010 A0548452 WLAN Handset 2211 Battery Pack NTTQ5050 A0548453 WLAN Handset 2211 Desktop Charger NTTQ5060 A0548454 WLAN 2210 2211 Charger amp WLAN Application Gateway 2246 64 NTTQ4101 A0548449 Power Supply for North America Global kit is the same as the North American kit without the power supply WLAN Handset 2211 Gang Charger NTTQ5070 A0548039 WLAN Handset 2210 Clothing Clip NTTQ4080 A0548940 WLAN Handset 2211 Clothing Clip NTTQ5101 A0548941 WLAN Handset Headset with noise cancellation NTTQ5501 A0548946 WLAN Handset Headset over ear A0548947 WLAN Handset Headset quick disconnect cord NTTQ5521 A0548948 WLAN Handset 2210 2211 User Guide CD ROM NTLH21AB A0548993 WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case black NTTQ 5111 A0548942 WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case key cover black NTTQ5131 A0548944 WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case yellow NTTQ5121 A0548943 WLAN Handset 2211 carrying case key cover yellow NTTQ5141 A0548945 Nortel WLAN IP Telephony Manager 2245 a minimum of one NTTQ60AA A048950 Telephony Manager is required per system order Communication Server 1000E Installation and Confi
206. ice Trunk Trunk Line card Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 452 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Table 58 Power Fail Transfer Unit connections Part 3 of 3 QUA6 J1 Cable Function Pair Color Connects to Telephone Telephone Line card Central Office Trunk Trunk Line card End of Procedure Connecting a trunk to a PFTU Follow Procedure 117 to connect a Trunk to a PFTU Procedure 117 Connecting a Trunk to a PFTU 1 Locate the PFTU terminal blocks at the cross connect terminal 2 Cross connect the first pair of the assigned PFTU to the telephone See Table 59 on page 453 for PFTU connections 3 Cross connect the second pair of the PFTU to the TN assigned to the telephone 4 Cross connect the third pair of the PFTU to the Central Office trunk 5 Cross connect the third pair of the PFTU to the TN assigned to the trunk 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Page 453 of 488 6 Repeat for each trunk assigned to the PFTU Table 59 Power Fail Transfer Unit connections Part 1 of 2 QUA6 J1 cable Function Connects to Connects to Telephone Telephone Line card TN assigned to the telephone Central office trunk Trunk Line card TN assigned to the Trunk Telephone Telephone Line card TN assigned to the telephone Central off
207. ice trunk Trunk Line card TN assigned to the Trunk Telephone Telephone Line card TN assigned to the telephone Central office trunk Trunk Line card TN assigned to the Trunk Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 454 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Table 59 Power Fail Transfer Unit connections Part 2 of 2 QUA6 J1 cable Function Connects to Telephone Connects to Telephone Line card TN assigned to the telephone Central office trunk Trunk Line card TN assigned to the Trunk Telephone Telephone Line card TN assigned to the telephone Central office trunk Trunk Line card TN assigned to the Trunk End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 455 of 488 Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU Contents This section contains information on the following topics I CIWION sce tacoe ele TETA TETE TEESE TET TENT 455 Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 456 Installing an alarm through QUA6 PFTU connections 457 Introduction This chapter describes the procedures for connecting an external alarm to the CS 1000E system This chapter contains the following procedure Procedure 118 Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 on page 456 The following are the two methods of
208. ides all boot parameters to the IP Phone including IP address and server address See Procedure 109 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters on page 430 For configuration of the DHCP server see Converging the Data Network with VoIP 553 3001 160 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 425 of 488 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using manual configuration Follow Procedure 107 to enter IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration Procedure 107 Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual configuration 1 Power the IP Phone Within four seconds the Nortel logo appears When the Nortel logo appears on the display you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right Note If the Nortel logo times out repeat step 1 and step 2 For the following prompts a Press the BKSpace backspace or Clear keys to change an entry b Enter new values using the telephone s keypad c Press the OK key to accept your selection The IP Phone prompts DHCP 0 No 1 Yes 0 Enter 0 for manual boot parameter configuration The IP Phone prompts SET IP x x x x Enter the IP Phone IP address The IP Phone prompts NETMSK X X X X Enter the subnet mask The IP Phone prompts DEF GW X X X X Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configur
209. ielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter The Media Card faceplate provides a female 8 pin mini DIN serial maintenance port connection The maintenance port on the Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter provides an alternative to the faceplate maintenance port Both are DTE ports with a speed of 9600 bit s CAUTION Service Interruption Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I O panel DB 9 male serial maintenance port at the same time Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 276 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 277 of 488 Verifying the network Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics InroductOi 2 96 ig RES Gg Sk deg dee SRRRRERGARISER SEDER SOS 277 Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces 278 Checking the status of the MG 1000T 100BaseT links 283 Checking MG 1000T trunking functionality 287 Establish CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T 287 The CS 1000E to Media Gateway links and ELAN interfaces are verified using LD 97 LD 117 LD 135 and LD 137 For details on LD 97 LD 117 LD 135 and LD 137 see the Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 71 Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces o
210. ies Software Customers Routes and Trunks Routes and Trunks D Channels Digital Trunk Interface Dialing and Numbering Plans Electronic Switched Network Network Routing Service Flexible Code Restriction Incoming Digit Conversion Services Backup and Restore Call Server Personal Directories Date and Time Logs and Reports Security 2 CS 1000 ELEMENT MANAGER Managing 207 179 153 99 Services Backup and Restore Call Server Backup and Restore Call Server Backup and Restore Backup Restore Select Backup Help Logout The Call Server Backup web page appears see Figure 80 on page 223 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 223 of 488 Figure 80 CS 1000E Backup Managing 207 179 153 99 Services Backup and Restore Call Server Backup and Restore Call Server Backup Call Server Backup Action Backup Submit Cancel 3 Select Backup from the Action drop down list box 4 Click Submit The message displays indicating Backup in progress Please wait 5 Click OK in the EDD complete dialog box The Backup function then displays information in a tabular form indicating the actions that were performed End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 224 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 225 of 488 Configuring
211. ignaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 for information about setting up a browser for optimal performance of Element Manager Note This procedure requires Service Pack 1 and Java Runtime environment Procedure 53 Launching Element Manager 1 Open the web browser 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 217 of 488 Enter the Signaling Server Node IP address in the Address Bar of the browser window and press Enter on the keyboard Note The ELAN network interface IP address may be required instead of the Node IP address to access the Element Manager login web page in secure environments Element Manager opens with the Login web page see Figure 76 Note If a security certificate has been correctly installed and the usage tule set to UserChoice the user will have the option of logging in using Secure mode If the usage rule is set to Always the user will be redirected to the https site and a warning message will appear a Enter a valid User ID and Password combination Note A valid User ID and Password combination is one which is defined on the Call Server The IP Address of the Call Server appears in the Call Server IP Address field b Click Login Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 218 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Figure 76 The Element Manager login gt CS 1000 ELEMENT MANAGER gt THIS
212. ignaling Server See Figure 64 for a co resident Signaling Server or Figure 65 on page 188 for a stand alone Signaling Server e Enter aif this Signaling Server will provide an H 323 Gatekeeper and a SIP Redirect Proxy Server e Enter b if this Signaling Server will provide only an H 323 Gatekeeper e Enter c if this Signaling Server will provide only a SIP Redirect Proxy Server e Enter d if this Signaling Server is a Leader Signaling Server and will not provide an NRS Go to step 13 on page 189 Refer to P Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 for more information on the NRS Figure 64 Network Routing Service NRS co resident Signaling Server CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please select the Network Routing Service NRS configuration for this Signaling Server Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt H 323 Gatekeeper and SIP Redirect Proxy Server lt b gt H 323 Gatekeeper only lt c gt SIP Redirect Proxy Server only lt d gt None Enter Choice gt Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 188 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 65 Network Routing Service NRS stand alone Signaling Server CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please select the Network Routing Service NRS configuration for this Signaling Server Please ente
213. ignaling Server Software CD ROM 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 173 of 488 3 If this is a re installation on an existing system observe the boot sequence Enter c at the boot menu shown in Figure 47 Note Entering c in the ISP1100 System Boot banner screen speeds up this process as the keyboard input is buffered Figure 47 Upgrade boot sequence ISP1100 System Boot Copyright 2002 2004 Nortel Networks Inc CPU PC PENTIUM Version x BSP version 1 2 0 Creation date Apr 22 2004 15 44 38 ataDrv 1 0 ATAPI Drive Found Controller 1 drive 0 Controller 1 drive 1 ATAPI Controller 1 drives found 1 Read boot parameters from C DROM H ard Disk 5 H Note f you do not select c within the ten second time out the Signaling Server boots to the existing software on the hard disk 4 _ Enter b at the menu shown in Figure 48 on page 174 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 174 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 48 Copy IP configuration Please insert an empty diskette in the floppy drive to backup the IP configuration Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Diskette is now in the floppy drive Continue lt b gt Continue without copying IP configuration lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt 5 When the Install Tool banner appears Fi
214. igure 147 Enter the password in the Node Password text box Select NodePwd from the Group drop down list c Select nodeTempPwdSet from the Command drop down list The area then displays the Uses and Timeout text boxes d Enter a value for the number of uses or a value for timeout in hours or both Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration 15 Figure 147 Node Temp Password Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 420 of 488 Click SET The temporary password is set Node EEN node emp SEN Password Uses fi Timeout fio nodeTem 16 17 18 Note 1 The entered password appears as asterisks The valid characters are 0 9 The password can be 6 to 14 digits in length Note 2 The temporary password automatically deletes itself after it has been used the defined number of times or when the duration expires whichever comes first Select NodePwd from the Group drop down list Select the nodePwdShow command from the Command drop down list Click RUN The updated temporary IP Phone Installer Password is displayed End of Procedure Installing IP Phone hardware components Follow Procedure 106 to install IP Phone hardware components Procedure 106 Installing IP Phone hardware components For details on installing hardware components see IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 1 Refer to Figure 148 on page 421 when installing the following Foo
215. in Figure 35 on page 115 the Media Card is installed in card slot 1 Therefore the adaptor is installed in connector Card 1 End of Procedure Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet Follow Procedure 19 to connect a Media Card to the ELAN Procedure 19 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet 1 Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the ELAN network interface on the Adaptor Figure 35 on page 115 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ 45 ELAN network interface on the BayStack 470 switch 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 115 of 488 Figure 35 Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter on the Media Gateway End of Procedure Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet Follow Procedure 20 to connect a Media Card to the TLAN subnet Procedure 20 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 1 Connect a standard CAT5 patch cable to the TLAN network interface on the adaptor see Figure 35 on page 115 2 Connect the other end of the standard CAT5 patch cable to an RJ 45 TLAN network interface on the BayStack 470 switch End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 116 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion Procedure 21 describes how to connect a Media Gateway Expander to the Media Gateway The Media Gateway Expander Cable Kit NTDK89
216. in Survival Mode 475 Retrieving CDR records from a survivable MG 1000T Expansion 476 Basic system telephony configuration 479 CWS 4 ik ok Se ee BE Re ee eS eee ee aes SewA 479 EON n 5425s aati eo EL ATE e T ETT oe E EO 479 Basic sysem CONNSUTENON spaa arn EEEE panes 479 MG 1000T card slot assignment 0 000 000 e eee 484 TN ASEN okore 6 Se ne SUN CATR OWA RE SES eR 485 Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database 487 ROOTES edo ont bids ee eo O ae dm We ace eee 487 TESCO OG anse eS aede8 Se ERAS PRA WERE reer HAA ede eee 487 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Contents Page 15 of 488 Implementation SUNAY pic icgaoseedceuaeswansdiewans bie Lows 487 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 16 of 488 Contents 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 17 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 1 Rack mounting a CS 1000E Call Server 77 Procedure 2 Removing the cover 200e0ee eee e eee naee 78 Procedure 3 Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway EXPQNGG 66 cs cassec due au in iani nase sean aces 80 Procedure 4 Preparing a Signaling Server for rack mounting 83 Procedure 5 Rack mounting a Signaling Server 86 Procedure 6 Installing an NTBK80 Ground Bar 93 Procedure 7 Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar 94 Procedure 8 Grounding Media
217. inks 1 Observe the link LEDs Layer2 network link on all Media Gateway 100BaseT Daughterboards See Figure 93 and Figure 94 on page 284 Note Cards in slot 1 can make viewing difficult Figure 93 SSC 100BaseT daughterboard link LED location Link LEDs d AL 0462 N Ahoan a p y Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 284 of 488 Verifying the network Figure 94 SSC 100BaseT daughterboard dual port LEDs Link Green For the NTDK83 these link LEDs indicate the status of port 1 when installed in the upper position of the NTDK20 SSC or port 2 when installed in the lower position of the NTDK20 SSC These link LEDs indicate the status of port 3 when installed in the upper position of the NTDK20 SSC or port 4 when installed in the lower position of the NTDK20 SSC 553 AAA0003 If the Link LED is green the Link is established b Ifthe Link LED is not lit check the daughterboard installation Check all cable connections to ensure that they are connected correctly Make sure that the cables are not damaged The receive and transmit LEDs should be flashing evidence of network activity 2 Observe Port LEDs on the Media Gateway SSC faceplates see Figure 95 on page 285 These LEDs show OSI Layer 7 Call Processing application indications If the Port LEDs are red the link is disabled and voice is disabled b Ifthe Port LEDs are yellow amber the link is establi
218. is Signaling Server has just been installed and you are logging in for the first time enter the default password cseadmin The system immediately prompts you to change the default password e If this is not the first login to the Signaling Server enter the appropriate password If you have forgotten the password reset it from the Tools Menu see Signaling Server Installation and Configuration 553 3001 212 End of Procedure To log out of the Signaling Server enter exit at the command line 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 197 of 488 Verifying a successful configuration To ensure that the Signaling Server Ethernet connections for the ELAN and TLAN subnets are configured correctly perform a ping test to one or more of the other devices connected to the network particularly the Call Server Procedure 46 Verifying the Signaling Server Ethernet connection 1 Login to the Signaling Server using Procedure 45 on page 196 2 Ping the IP address of the Signaling Server Enter the command ping x x x x Where x x x x is the Signaling Server ELAN network interface IP address 3 Ping the IP address of the Call Server Enter the command ping x x x x 3 Where x x x x is the Call Server ELAN network interface IP address 4 If desired repeat step 3 for other devices connected to the network End of Procedure Testing the Leader Signaling Server
219. it Transfer Status Delete 3 Click Edit next to the Node to which the Voice Gateway Media Card is to be added The Edit web page opens as shown in Figure 100 on page 323 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 323 of 488 Figure 100 Edit web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Contiquration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Edit Save and Transfer Cancel Node ID 8 Voice LAN TLAN Node IP address 192 168 253 7 gt Management LAN ELAN gateway IP address 20717915397 Management LAN ELAN subnet mask 255 255 255 224 Voice LAN TLAN subnet mask 255 255 255 0 SNMP Add VGW and IP phone codec profile QoS LAN configuration SNTP H323 GW Settings Firmware SIP GW Settings SIP URI Map SIP CD Services Cards Signaling Servers Save and Transfer Cancel 4 Click Add next to the Cards tab The Cards tab expands see Figure 101 on page 324 5 Enter your data for this Voice Gateway Media Card The ELAN MAC address is on a faceplate sticker The TN is the Voice Gateway Media Card logical card slot See Table 41 on page 338 Note For more detail on Voice Gateway Media Card properties see IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 324 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Me
220. l Server 0 2 Plug the other end of the CAT5E RJ 45 NTRC17 crossover cable into the LAN 2 connector on the front of Call Server 1 End of Procedure Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers The MultiLink Trunking MLT feature of the BayStack 470 24T enables the two uplink fiber ports to be grouped but is not solely necessary for the two uplink fiber ports to be linked Grouping the uplink fiber ports increases aggregate throughput up to 2 Gbps between sides with active redundant links Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 106 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components The port based VLANs used in the BayStack 470 24T switches operate in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q tagging rules VLAN ports are grouped into broadcast domains by assigning them to the same VLAN Frames received in one VLAN can be forwarded only within that VLAN For more information see Communication Server 1000 System Redundancy 553 3001 307 Procedure 13 Connecting Campus Redundant Call Servers 1 Connect the CAT5E RJ 45 LAN 2 port of Call Server 0 to a 100BaseT ELAN network interface on the local Baystack 470 24T switch 2 Connect the CAT5E RJ 45 LAN 2 port of Call Server 1 toa 100BaseT port on the remote Baystack 470 24T switch 3 Link the two Baystack 470 24T switches with two high speed single mode fiber uplinks 1 Gbps per link using the built in GBIC ports for dedicated uplink connectivity 4 Assign three VLANs to t
221. lation and Configuration Page 236 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller Installing software on an MG 1000E SSC The MG 1000E is shipped with a pre programmed software daughterboard that must be mounted on the SSC IMPORTANT Before proceeding ensure that the required hardware is correctly installed and that all connections are secure Procedure 59 Installing software on an MG 1000E SSC 1 Confirm that the outlet is providing the correct voltage Refer to the label at the back of the equipment 2 Connect the power cord from the power connectors at the back of the MG 1000E to an AC power source 3 Ensure that the system terminal TTY is connected to the cable marked port 0 on the NTBK48 3 port cable of the Media Gateway 4 Turn the Media Gateway power switch to ON System response Current system time and date 2 14 2096 6 19 00 Enter new time hh mm ss 14 41 00 Enter new date mm dd yy 06 03 04 14 41 0 6 3 2004 is the new system time and date Is this correct y n a bort y qluit hJelp or 7 lt cr gt redisplay 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000E Small System Controller Page 237 of 488 5 Enter y System response SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROGRAM Verify Media Gateway IP Expansion Security ID 40000322 Call Server Main Security ID 19999999 Media Gateway Expansion Cabinet Software Installation Main Menu 1
222. le the multi user option Enable the multi user option to access Command Line Interface CLI overlays and Element Manager at the same time For more information about 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 367 of 488 Limited Access to Overlays see Features and Services 553 3001 306 and Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 Configuring MS Internet Explorer Element Manager is available to configure IP telephony parameters on the system It is accessed by pointing MS Internet Explorer version 6 0 2600 or higher to the ELAN subnet TLAN subnet or node IP address of the Signaling Server Note Element Manager requires Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 2600 or higher The Netscape browser is not supported IMPORTANT Internet Explorer caching must be turned off If Internet Explorer caching is on the user cannot see the changes in real time Follow Procedure 92 to prevent caching of web pages by Internet Explorer Procedure 92 Turning off browser caching in Internet Explorer 1 Launch Internet Explorer 2 Click Tools gt Internet Options The Internet Options window opens see Figure 128 on page 368 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 368 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Figure 128 Internet Explorer Internet Options Internet Options 2 x General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced
223. ler 417 Procedure 106 Installing IP Phone hardware components 420 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 26 of 488 List of Procedures Procedure 107 Entering IP Telephone boot parameters using manual CONIQUPANION asrnane dese e ee eee ideo ee suenes 425 Procedure 108 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using full DHCP parameters is caniegintG derdi arin ewe weds 428 Procedure 109 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters 222 20 s00s0eceecece cs eees 430 Procedure 110 Using Set Based Installation 0 0005 433 Procedure 111 Configuring the IP Softphone 2050 436 Procedure 112 Installing the USB Headset Kit 000 437 Procedure 113 Installing the IP Softphone 2050 on your PC 437 Procedure 114 Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager 200eeeee eee ee eeeeeee 439 Procedure 115 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU 442 Procedure 116 Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone toaPFITU nce ree ssacccokeeessnsseskeceeeseseaes 450 Procedure 117 Connecting a Trunk toa PFTU 0002e enue 452 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 List of Procedures Page 27 of 488 Procedure 118 Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned IN LD 15 aos ce cin ess cen ie dw cess Aen 456 Procedure 119 Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion 472
224. lete STAT the CPU and verify that the CPUs are in a true redundant state LD 135 STAT CPU Get status of CPU and memory EREE Exit the program 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 143 of 488 stat cpu cp 0 16 PASS STDBY TRUE REDUNDANT DISK STATE REDUNDANT HEALTH 20 VERSION Mar 3 2005 16 26 40 Side 0 DRAM SIZE 512 MBytes cp 1 16 PASS ENBL TRUE REDUNDANT DISK STATE REDUNDANT HEALTH 20 VERSION Mar 3 2005 16 26 40 Side 1 DRAM SIZE 512 MBytes Tier 1 and Tier 2 health of both Call Servers must be identical in order to successfully switch service from Call Server 1 to Call Server 0 LD 135 STAT HEALTH Get status of CPU and memory KREE Exit the program Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 144 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E Sstat health Local Side 0 Act Components without ive Redundant TIER 1 Health contribution TIER 1 Health Coun disp 0 15 1 In Service sio2 0 15 1 In Service cp 0 16 In Service ipb 0 In Service t Breakdown sio8 0 16 1 sio8 0 16 2 sutl 0 15 strn 0 15 xsmp 0 15 1 eth 0 16 0 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 0002 Local TIER 1 Health Total 20 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 145 of 488 TIER 2 Heal
225. ling telephones 240ds 0442 te ew doen v den gheeeacasge eden 35 ane telephonie caste iid toirte e eoi 39 Safety issues associated with the installation of a CS 1000E are identified in this section To avoid personal injury and equipment damage review the safety instructions before handling the equipment WARNING Failure to follow the safety instructions in this chapter could result in personal injury CAUTION Damage to Equipment Failure to follow the safety instructions in this chapter could result in damage to equipment Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 34 of 488 Safety instructions Lifting system equipment Care should be exercised when lifting system components If necessary get assistance to lift a component or install a component in a rack The weight of the system component can be found in the component profiles in System components on page 41 Before lifting or installing a component Ensure that the planned location and the route to that location are free of obstacles and debris Determine the weight of the components see component profiles in System components on page 41 Get help with heavy components or components that are to be placed in the upper section of a rack Handling circuit cards CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Static electricity can damage circuit cards Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit cards or their components Foll
226. lly enter the password in three attempts the IP Phone continues its registration process as if no entry had been made to this prompt You can reboot the telephone and try again if more tries are needed The IP Phone prompts TN X X Enter the IP Phone s virtual TN The IP Phone displays the logo the date and time and the DN keys Check for dial tone and the correct DN above the display End of Procedure Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters Follow Procedure 109 to enter IP Telephone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters Procedure 109 Entering IP Phone boot parameters using partial DHCP parameters 1 Power up the IP Phone Within four seconds the Nortel logo appears When the Nortel logo appears on the display you have one second to press the four feature keys at the bottom of the display in sequence from left to right Note If the Nortel logo times out repeat step 1 and step 2 For the following prompts a Press the BKSpace backspace or Clear keys to change an entry b Enter new values using the telephone s keypad Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration 10 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 431 of 488 c Press the OK key to accept your selection The IP Phone prompts DHCP 0 No 1 Yes 0 Enter 1 to use DHCP The IP Phone prompts DHCP 0 Full 1 Partial 0 Enter the 1 to use Partial DHCP The IP Phone prompts Sl IP x x x x
227. lly perform an EDD which must be initiated through an appropriate command in LD 43 New backup rules Three new backup rule types are introduced with CP PIV e FTP an external FTP server is accessed for storing or retrieving backup data e FMD fixed media device for storing backup data in a special directory on the u partition A CP PII system stores the data on a local hard drive while a CP PIV system uses an on board Compact Flash card e RMD removable media device for storing backup data The RMD rule type is available only on a CP PIV system Note New backup rules are not available for Geographic Redundancy Database Replication Control GRDRC For more detailed information about backup and restore commands see Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Maintenance 553 3021 500 Signaling Server The Signaling Server as shown in Figure 3 and describ ed in Table 2 provides signaling interfaces to the network using software components that run on a real time operating system You can install Signaling Servers in a load sharing redundant configuration for higher scalability and reliability The Signaling Server is equipped with several software components e IP Phone Terminal Proxy Server TPS e H 323 Signaling Gateway virtual trunk e H 323 Gatekeeper e SIP Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 46 of 488 System components e Network Routing Service e Element
228. lowing sample lines display on the screen Copying cd0 sse37012 p3 disk sys to u disk sys Processing the install control file cd0 sse37012 p3 install dat parsed The screen shown in Figure 57 on page 182 shows actions that can be performed Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 182 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 57 Installation Status CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx Option software Please enter lt y gt Yes start complete installation lt n gt No cancel complete installation and return to the Main Menu Enter Choice gt 8 Enter y to start the installation The screens shown in Figures 58 to 62 which start on page 185 appear 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 183 of 488 Figure 58 Installation output CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx You have selected to install version x xx xx on the system As this is a new install all necessary directories and files will be created on the hard disk Starting new install of version x xx xx Initializing protected partition p initialized Creating directory many directories are created here Copying many files are copied here Boot ROM p load bootrom bin installed Figure 59
229. maximum four Media Cards maximum four Application cards maximum four Connectors The 25 pair cable connectors at the back of the rear unit see Figure 10 on page 60 provide access to the cross connect terminal Main Distribution Frame A Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter can also be used The AUX port connects a Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU The DS 30X and CE MUX cables connect the Media Gateway to the Media Gateway Expander Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 60 of 488 System components Figure 10 Connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Expander Universal AC power DS 30Xx CE MUX z gt p 25 pair connectors 19 inch Rack Mount Kit A 19 inch Rack Mount Kit NTTKO9AA is available for mounting a Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander in a 19 inch rack It is described in Table 6 on page 60 Table 6 NTTKO9AA installation P0904844 Left Rack Mount Bracket P0904845 Right Rack Mount Bracket 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 System components Page 61 of 488 Table 6 NTTKO9AA installation Order Code Description P0906672 Left Shelf Mounting Bracket U O P097F813 Screw 216 24 X 500 STL 289A P0719943 Sems Ext Tooth Washer Pan Head CR Type1A 0 164 32 X P0906671 Right Shelf Mounting Bracket U O P0719587 Sems Ext Tooth Washer Pan Head CR Type 1A 0 138 3 Ba
230. media between DSP and IP phone Media path flows between DSP and IP phone MG 1000E 15 000 Desktop Clients CS tells IP Phone to ring via SS is Follow Procedure 14 to connect the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1000E Procedure 14 Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1000E 1 Connect the CAT5 RJ 45 ELAN 1 port on Call Server 0 to the BayStack 470 2 Connect the CAT5 RJ 45 ELAN 1 port on Call Server 1 to the BayStack 470 24T 3 Connect port 1 of the MG 1000E 100BaseT daughterboard 2 to the bulkhead connector 1 as shown in Figure 30 on page 108 Connect the 100BaseT Port 1 at the back of the Media Gateway to the BayStack 470 Refer to Figure 31 on page 108 for the location of the 100BaseT port Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 108 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components Note 1 Physical ports 1 and 2 on the 100BaseT daughterboard 2 are logical ports 2 and 4 Note 2 Up to 30 MG 1000E can be connected to the ELAN subnet controlled by the CS 1000E Core Call Servers Figure 30 Bulkhead connector for IP daughterboard pee bed Figure 31 Media Gateway connectors Ss 100BaseT ports 4 Repeat step 3 for each MG 1000E in the system 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting CS 1000E system components Page 109 of 488 Note The MG1000E can be connected directly to the CS1000E ELAN subnet or it can be connected to the
231. menu shown in Figure 53 on page 179 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 179 of 488 Figure 53 Hard disk test CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx The Install Tool cannot determine when the hard disk was last tested The hard disk must be tested before installation can continue This test will take approximately 14 minutes Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Test the hard disk Enter Choice gt a e Ifthe hard disk has not recently been tested enter a at the menu shown in Figure 54 Figure 54 Not recently tested CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx The Install Tool has detected that the hard disk has not been tested recently It is recommended to test the hard disk now This test will take approximately 14 minutes Please enter lt a gt Test the hard disk lt b gt Skip the hard disk test Enter Choice gt a If the hard disk has been checked in the last 24 hours enter a at the menu shown in Figure 55 on page 180 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 180 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 55 Tested within 24 hours CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx The Install Tool has detected that the hard disk has been tested recently It is recommended to skip t
232. n Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 e Telephones and Consoles Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 367 e IP Phones Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 368 e Software Input Output Maintenance 553 3001 511 e ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance 553 3001 517 e ISDN Basic Rate Interface Maintenance 553 3001 518 e Communication Server 1000S Overview 553 3031 010 e Communication Server 1000S Planning and Engineering 553 303 1 120 e Communication Server 1000S Upgrade Procedures 553 303 1 258 e Communication Server 1000S Maintenance 553 3031 500 Other documentation The following documentation is referenced in this document e Nordex BIX documentation e Krone documentation Online To access Nortel documentation online click the Technical Documentation link under Support amp Training on the Nortel home page www nortel com CD ROM To obtain Nortel documentation on CD ROM contact your Nortel customer representative Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 32 of 488 About this document 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 33 of 488 Safety instructions Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INGCOMCUON a0 icse icc gcdse eee he hen rae EREA ERE AA 33 Liting system EQUIPINENE ereis rreri taren Eee CS 34 Handiinie ciretit Catd s s osorrrveriaserisruteaa c tiiat kiin 34 Instal
233. n page 278 e Procedure 72 Checking the status of MG 1000T Core to MG 1000T Expansion 1 4 100BaseT links on page 283 e Procedure 73 Checking the status of the MG 1000T trunks on page 287 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 278 of 488 Verifying the network Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces Follow Procedure 71 to check the status of the ELAN network interfaces Note IP addresses used are for example only Procedure 71 Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces 1 Observe the ELAN Ethernet LEDs Layer 2 network link on all Media Gateway SSC cards See Figure 94 on page 284 a Ifthe ELAN LED is green the Link is established b Ifthe Link LED is not lit check all cable connections to ensure that they are connected correctly and not damaged The ELAN red and yellow LEDs flash when there is network activity Note Cards in slot 1 can make viewing difficult 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Figure 92 SSC card ELAN LED location Verifying the network Page 279 of 488 Access LD 137 Enter the command LD 137 Display the status of the Call Server ELAN network interface Enter the command STAT ELNK System response stat elnk ELNK ENABLED Auto Negotiation Enabled Auto Negotiation Completed YES Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 280 of 488 Verifying the network Actual Line Speed Actual Duplex Mo
234. n a rack 2 Fasten the left guide bracket to the left rack support a Insert two 10 32 machine screws into the two middle slots in the bracket and into the respective holes in the left rack support b Fasten the screws 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 81 of 488 3 Attach the right ear bracket marked with an R to the holes on the right side of the Media Gateway a Use two 8 32 machine screws Position the ear bracket so that the four holes on the bracket flange are nearer to the rear of the Media Gateway Note To determine the front of the bracket locate the R on the bracket The R must be at the top of the bracket and face the front of the Media Gateway see Figure 17 Figure 17 Right ear bracket on a Media Gateway Bracket flange marked with an R Attach this ear bracket to the right hand side of the Media Gateway Attach the ear bracket to these holes 4 Attach the left ear bracket marked with an L to the holes on the left side of the Media Gateway near the front Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 82 of 488 Rack mounting the components a Use two 8 32 machine screws Position the ear bracket so the four holes on the bracket flange are closer to the rear of the Media Gateway Note To determine the front of the bracket locate the L on the bracket The L
235. n damage circuit cards Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling circuit cards or any of their components 1 Unpack the 100BaseT daughterboard single port NTDK99 and the NTDUO0606 cable see Figure 83 Figure 83 100BaseT daughterboard single port NTDK99 NTDUO606 Ethernet cable Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 232 of 488 Configuring a Small System Controller 2 Using one of the NTIDU0606 CAT5 Ethernet cables a Attach port number label 1 to the cable b Install the cable firmly into the RJ 45 port on the 100BaseT daughterboard single port Make sure that the cable end is inserted completely See Figure 84 on page 233 Note Do not connect the LED cable to the 100BaseT daughterboard single port 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring a Small System Controller Page 233 of 488 Figure 84 SSC components including a 100BaseT daughterboard single port NTDK57DA NT_REM Security Device NTM400 Software daughterboard LED cables not used LEDs Xmit Rev Link NTDUO606 Cable Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 234 of 488 Configuring a Small System Controller 3 Install the 100BaseT daughterboard single port in slot 2 of the SSC a b Locate the alignment pin on the SSC Insert the alignment pin into the appropriate hole on the 100BaseT daughterboard single port Secure the 100BaseT daughter
236. nce terminal to it See P Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for detailed maintenance procedures End of Procedure Verifying a card Verifying a card involves e Procedure 81 Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status on page 340 e Procedure 82 Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels on page 341 e Procedure 83 Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units on page 344 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 340 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card e Procedure 84 Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card on page 347 Procedure 81 Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status 1 In Element Manager select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Maintenance and Reports from the navigator The Node Maintenance and Reports web page opens as shown in Figure 115 Figure 115 Node Maintenance and Reports web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Maintenance and Reports Node Maintenance and Reports Node ID 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Total elements 3 Click buttons to invoke a command 2 Open the desired node by clicking on the next to the Node ID This displays the Signaling Servers and Voice Gateway Media Cards belonging to the node as shown in Figure 116 on page 341 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 Septembe
237. nd rear Rack mounting a CS 1000E Call Server Items required The following items are required to mount a CS 1000E Call Server in a 19 inch rack e equipment layout plan e 4 10 32 machine screws Use the screw type recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment racks CAUTION Damage to Equipment The CS 1000E Call Server chassis is constructed of light weight aluminum It can be damaged if the unit is lifted from the shipping box by its top plate 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 77 of 488 Procedure 1 Rack mounting a CS 1000E Call Server 1 Slide the CS 1000E Call Server into the rack until the ear brackets rest against the rack support See Figure 13 Figure 13 CS 1000E Call Server with installed ear brackets 2 Fasten the CS 1000E Call Server to the rack supports with 10 32 machine screws two screws on each side End of Procedure Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander References to the Media Gateway in this section also apply to the Media Gateway Expander The Media Gateway Expander can be mounted either above or below the Media Gateway The following items are required to mount each Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander in a 19 inch rack e equipment layout plan e 8 10 32 machine screws e 19 Inch Rack Mount Kit NTTKO9 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 78 of 488 Rack mounting the components
238. nd configuring the Signaling Server software files If you cannot create a CD refer to the CD writer s software documentation Once the CD is created you can use it to install new software or to upgrade software on an existing Signaling Server Installing the software Before proceeding you must complete Procedure 16 on page 111 and Procedure 17 on page 112 Procedure 44 Installing the Signaling Server software After you complete step 1 below this procedure takes approximately 20 minutes 1 From your Planning and Engineering group obtain the following network and IP Telephony data for this Signaling Server e node ID for the IP Telephony node e node IP address for the IP Telephony node e hostname for the Signaling Server e ELAN network interface IP address Subnet mask and Gateway e TLAN network interface IP address Subnet mask and Gateway e ELAN network interface IP address of the Call Server e Primary and Alternate NRS IP addresses for this networked system refer to IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 e NRS role if applicable refer to IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 2 __ Insert the Software CD ROM into the Signaling Server CD drive and press the RST button on the front panel to cold reboot the Signaling Server Note The Software CD ROM should be bootable If not create a boot floppy using the files in the mkboot directory on the S
239. ndard 4 00 September 2007 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Page 361 of 488 Figure 125 Cable connectors at the back of the Media Gateway 100 Das s b mnan a_i 3 Ez mE 25 pair EE ptem iat connectors Figure 126 Cable connectors at the back of the Media Gateway Expander NORTEL NTDUJ4 NET woRes ispi 25 pair connectors Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 362 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame 4 Figure 127 AUX cable connector Tighten the velcro straps when you have connected each cable to the system Terminate all the 25 pair cables installed at the cross connect terminal Label all the cables at the cross connect terminal blocks according to the card slot assignment plan Connect the AUX cable in the upper 9 pin connector located on the top left hand side of the Media Gateway See Figure 127 on page 362 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Page 363 of 488 8 When auxiliary power is required from the QUA6 PFTU terminate the AUX cable at the PFTU cross connect terminal according to Table 42 Table 42 AUX cable termination information Wire number Designation Connection BRTN to QUA6 J1 1R BRTN to QUA6 J1 2R 48V AUX to QUA6 J1 250mA 25T 25R PFTS to QUA6 J1 2T Not used Not used Not used Not used End of
240. necting a Power Fail Transfer Unit on page 441 for connecting trunks with the PFTU End of Procedure Universal Trunk card connections The Universal Trunk card NT8D14 provides eight Analog trunks that can function in the modes identified in Table 20 Refer to Table 21 on page 296 for the connections to the Universal trunk at the cross connect terminal Table 20 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card modes and option settings Modes Location Jumper strap Central CO J1 J2 OFF 2 way TIE trunk loop Dial Repeat J1 J2 OFF 2 way TIE trunk Outgoing Incoming J1 J2 OFF Dial Recorded Announcement RAN J1 J2 OFF Paging trunk J1 J2 OFF Japan CO DID operation J1 J2 OFF DID operation J1 J2 ON Loop length gt 2000 ohms DID operation J1 J2 Loop length lt 2000 ohms Note 1 OFF indicates that no strap is present Note 2 J1 and J2 locations apply to all eight trunks Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 296 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 21 NT8D14 Universal Trunk connections Part 1 of 2 All other Cable from equipment modes Designations 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 297 of 488 Table 21 NT8D14 Universal Trunk connections Part 2 of 2 All other Cable from equipment modes Designations
241. necting a trunk card Table 24 E amp M 2 wire Type 2 Part 2 of 2 Table 25 E amp M TIE Trunk card 4 Wire Part 1 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Card 10 from equipment Column 1 Type1 amp 5 Column 2 Type1 amp 5 Lead Designations RA RB TA TB TA RA 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 303 of 488 Table 25 E amp M TIE Trunk card 4 Wire Part 2 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Column 1 Column 2 Card 10 from equipment Type1 amp 5 Type1 amp 5 4T RA 4R RB 5T TA 5R TB 6T R O E 6R O R M 7T R BR RA 7R BR R RB 8T R S TA 8R S R TB 9T BK BL E 9R BL BK 11 M 10T BK G 38 RA 10R G BK 13 RB 11T BK BR 39 TA 11R BR BK 14 TB 12T BK S 40 E 12R S BK 15 M Note The cable pair designated TA TB is the transmit pair The pair designated RA RB is the receive pair Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 304 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 26 E amp M TIE Trunk card Part 1 of 2 Cables Card 1 through Card 10 from equipment Column 1 Type 2 Column 2 Type 2 Lead Designations RA RB RA RB TA TB TA E1 E2 M1 M2 RA RB TA TB E1 E2 M1 M2 RA RB TA TB E1 E2 55
242. ng brackets B c 6 rack mount bracket screws 10 25 x 1 4 panhead Phillips Refer to Figure 19 Figure 19 Signaling Server mounting accessories Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 84 of 488 Rack mounting the components Note The Front Mount Bracket assembly is not intended for use as a slide rail system The Signaling Server must be firmly attached to the rack 2 Align the end of the rail with the flange B toward the rear of the Signaling Server See Figure 20 on page 84 Figure 20 Chassis support bracket 3 Align the screw holes in the rack mount rail to the mating holes in the side of the Signaling Server chassis Use three screws C on each side Note Hand tighten the screws to prevent cross threading then use a Phillips screwdriver to secure them 4 Attach the bezel door to the faceplate of the Signaling Server as shown in Figure 21 on page 85 and Figure 22 on page 85 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 85 of 488 Figure 21 Left hinge mount Figure 22 Right hinge mount Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 86 of 488 Rack mounting the components When the door is attached to the Signaling Server and rack mount apparatus it should appear as shown in Figure 23 Figure 23 Snapped in bezel door Us End of Procedure Procedure 5 Rack mounting a Signaling Ser
243. ng through the re start procedure it attempts to register with the MG 1000T Core 4 Ifa connection cannot be made to the core processor the MG 1000T Expansion comes up in Survival Mode Manual Switchover to Survival Mode Manual commands are provided to enable a technician to force a switch over to Survival Mode These commands are available only on the MG 1000T Core They can be used only if an IP link is established between the MG 1000T Core and an MG 1000T Expansion To manually switch over to Survival Mode use the SOTS command in LD 135 CAUTION Service Interruption A manually invoked switch over causes a restart of the MG 1000T After the SOTS command has been successfully executed the MG 1000T Expansion remains in Survival Mode until the Switchback From Survival SBFS command is issued The SBFS command is issued in LD 135 CAUTION System Failure If the software is upgraded on the MG 1000T Core it must also be upgraded on the MG 1000T Expansion for Survivability to function In Survival Mode a valid database must be downloaded to the MG 1000T Expansion in order to function The database is downloaded or synchronized each time a datadump is performed An exact copy of the database on the MG 1000T Core is downloaded to the MG 1000T with every datadump Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 464 of 488 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Swi
244. nnection in the AC electrical panel 3 Place a tag marked DO NOT DISCONNECT on the ground wire at the electrical panel 4 Test the ground Refer to Figure 26 on page 94 for the NTBK80 Ground Bar Table 12 Region specific grounding wire requirements Grounding wire requirements Germany 8 AWG 8 36 mm green yellow wire Other regions in Europe not smaller than 6 AWG 13 3 mm at any point UK two green yellow wires no thinner than two 10 mm Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 94 of 488 Installing system grounds Figure 26 NTBK80 Ground Bar End of Procedure Follow Procedure 7 to install an NTDU6201 Ground Bar Procedure 7 Installing an NTDU6201 Ground Bar 1 Place the NTDU6201 Ground Bar near the equipment Note The ground bar is a bridging point for ground wires from up to 48 components 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing system grounds Page 95 of 488 2 Connect the NTDU6201 Ground Bar to the ground bus in the AC electrical panel or to TGB for an ANSI EIA TIA 607 installation using 6 AWG wire See Table 12 on page 93 for region specific grounding requirements WARNING A qualified technician or electrician must make the connection in the AC electrical panel 3 Place a tag marked DO NOT DISCONNECT on the ground wire at the electrical panel 4 Test the ground End of Procedure Grounding a CS 1000E Call Server The CS 1000E Call
245. nnels Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration VGV Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153 114 TN 12 Add VGW channels Add VGW channels Basic Configuration Input Description Pint vate Muttiple VGW channel input number MTINPUT L E Trunk data block TYPE Terminal Number TN 12 31 Designator field for trunk DES Extended Trunk XTRK Customer number CUST Zone number ZONE Range 0 255 Submit Cancel Mandatory fields of current configuration 5 Enter the appropriate parameters to configure the VGW channels The TN is the logical TN of the first Voice Gateway Media Card unit See Table 41 on page 338 for the logical slot numbers Note The Media Card has 8 or 32 channels The ITG P card has 24 channels 6 Click Submit 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 327 of 488 The VGW channels for this card are displayed See Figure 104 on page 327 Note f you receive an error that a pad category table does not exist for this customer go back to your DTI configuration step see Basic system telephony configuration on page 479 and create a default DTI Data Block DDB and then perform this procedure again Figure 104 VGW channels list Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration WGVY Channels Node 8 Card 207 179 153
246. ns on page 318 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 311 of 488 Table 32 NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations Part 1 of 2 Pair color Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 312 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Table 32 NT5K17 Direct Inward Dial card terminations Part 2 of 2 Pair color Note The connections on the NT5K18 Exchange Line Trunk card are polarity sensitive Make sure the ground side of the trunk is connected to the A leg of the NT5K18 circuit Make sure the 50 Volt side of the trunk is connected to the B leg of the NT5K18 circuit Table 33 NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross connect terminations Part 1 of 2 Pair color 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Page 313 of 488 Table 33 NT5K18 Exchange line trunk card cross connect terminations Part 2 of 2 Pair color Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 314 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Note The speech pairs on the NT5K19 card are polarity insensitive The E amp M signaling pairs however are polarity sensitive Make sure the ground side of the trunk is connected to the A leg of the NT5K19 circuit Make sure t
247. ns Set Up Transmit 2400 No Local Echo Receive Transmit Data Leads Only Xoff at 64 Disconnect 2 s Delay 8bits No Parity Limited Transmit 1 Stop Bit Printer Set Up Speed 9600 Normal Print Mode Print Full Page 8bits No Parity Print National Only 1 Stop bit No Terminator Keyboard Set up Typewriter Keys Warning Bell Caps Lock Break Auto Repeat Answerback Keyclick High Not Concealed Margin Bell Tab Set Up Screen Leave this screen at the default values CS 1000E Core Call Server SDI connection Each CS 1000E Core Call Server has two SDI ports on the Call Server CPU card COM1 and COM2 Both COM1 and COM2 are standard RS232 DTE ports 9 pin male COM 1 is used for maintenance access and COM2 is for an external modem connection Both SDI ports COM1 and COM2 are set to e Baud rate 9600 e Data bit 8 e Stop bit 1 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 270 of 488 Configuring a terminal and SDI ports e Parity none e Flow control none MG 1000E SDI connection SDI connection to the MG 1000E is made at the back See Figure 88 on page 272 for location of the 9 pin DTE male connector It is modified to isolate pins 6 7 and 8 Use PORTO of NTBK48AA 3 port SDI cable for terminal connection Note Connection must be made initially to each MG 1000E to set the IP address MG 1000T SDI connection A terminal modem or other device such as CDR devices and additional
248. ntains information on the following topics MIELA E re oii die uMate pend weeoe wae E E ewan T ET 241 Software Installation Program 0 ce ee eee eee eee 242 IGPU Gs i es Se SERA ESE ede d ben daneal then ieee a TT 244 Installing soitware on an SSC 4 ccc dees ge rscadeeieaeaiededows 245 setting the systemi time and date 5 40scseesceetsieaserwntsosn 250 Introduction The Nortel Communication Server 1000 4 5 software is installed on the Small System Controller SSC using the Software Installation Program The Software Installation Program provides a menu driven method of installing modifying or upgrading e software e feature set packages e License parameters This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 60 Installing software on an SSC on page 245 e Procedure 61 Setting system time and date on page 250 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 242 of 488 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Software Installation Program The Software Installation Program main menu provides access to the following functionality e installing software in a new system e upgrading and modifying software in an existing system e using utilities to work with archived databases review data back up data undo an installation in progress and clear unwanted data In addition the Software Installation Program has the following options e Clear Upgrade Information If
249. nts in a Media Gateway Expander Slot 7 553 CSE9032 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 386 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Circuit cards features If a circuit card has a switch symbol on its faceplate it is equipped with option switches strapping plugs or both Make sure that the circuit cards with option switches or strapping plugs are set correctly Some circuit cards can have daughterboards and other add on devices installed on them Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expansion The work order developed by the planning and engineering department outlines the placement of peripheral cards in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander slots See Circuit Card Description and Installation 553 3001 211 for card placement into card slots The 48 port Digital Line Card is not supported Cross connecting telephones Connect the telephones according to Figure 141 on page 387 and Figure 142 on page 388 Procedure 98 Cross connecting telephones 1 Locate the telephone terminations at the cross connect terminal 2 Connect the Z type cross connect wire to the leads of the telephone 3 Locate line circuit card TN terminations at the cross connect terminal 4 Connect the other end of the cross connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones
250. o assign a server address select sound devices and select a server type End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 438 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones Running the IP Softphone 2050 for the first time Installation places the IP Softphone 2050 in the Windows Start menu at Start gt Programs gt Nortel gt IP Softphone 2050 The Configuration Utility is placed in the Windows Control Panel The IP Softphone 2050 application is started by one of the following e Select Start gt Programs gt Nortel gt IP Softphone 2050 e Click the desktop shortcut if one was created during the installation e Automatic start up sequence Note If you want the IP Softphone 2050 to start automatically when the PC boots place a shortcut to the application in the Start up folder When an IP Softphone 2050 starts for the first time and connects to the network it executes a start up sequence The elements of the start up sequence are as follows e Get the IP parameters e Find a gateway server and authenticate the user As the IP Softphone 2050 registers with the system the following occurs e Ifanon null node password is enabled it prompts for a node number and password Enter the node number and password using the keyboard or numeric keypad After the password is verified enter the TN of the IP Softphone 2050 See IP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 for m
251. o the TLAN subnet 166 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 166 Several system connections are required to make the MG 1000T operational The MG 1000T must be connected to the CS 1000E through the TLAN subnet The MG 1000T Core is directly connected with a CATS cross over cable to each of the MG 1000T Expansions The Media Gateway is directly connected to the Media Gateway Expander The system s components such Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 154 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components as the Signaling Server and the Media Cards installed in the Media Gateway require both ELAN subnet and TLAN subnet connections An MG 1000T provides CS 1000E system access to e PSTN e Nortel Integrated DECT DECT e Nortel WLAN IP Telephony The MG 1000T have sufficient intelligence to handle digit manipulation and call routing functions without using the resources of the Core Call Server The SSC in the MG 1000T Core functions as the Primary Controller for the MG 1000T This MG 1000T Core with its MG 1000T Expander provides 8 slots for IPE cards The additional four Survivable MG 1000T Expansions with their Media Gateway Expanders provide an additional 32 IPE slots They are linked to the MG 1000T Core This maximum configuration allows up to 20 El interfaces or 40 IPE card slots The MG 1000T Expander cannot support PRI D Channel type cards The MG 1000T Expander ar
252. oduct Family page opens Under the Succession Enterprise gt Signaling Server and IP Peer Networking headings click Software Download the Signaling Server CD image a Click on the link for the appropriate Signaling Server CD image The CD ROM image includes the Signaling Server software as well as IP Phone firmware and Voice Gateway Media Card loadware If not logged in to a My Nortel account click on Log In to sign in Note f you are not registered to access this web site refer to the CS 1000 product bulletin for directions on how to register The Software Software Details Information page appears Click the link next to File Download In the Save As window choose the desired path to save the file to the local disk on your PC and click Save End of Procedure Procedure 43 Creating a Signaling Server Software CD ROM 1 Use the software option to burn or create a CD from the CD image Do not drag and drop as this can result in a file copy and a CD ROM that does not work Do not write the ISO file to the CD ROM Note Select the disk at once write option Close the session Label the CD appropriately for example Signaling Server sse x xx xx End of Procedure The Software CD ROM must be readable in a standard CD ROM drive After you create a CD from the CD image the CD contains several directories and Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 172 of 488 Installing a
253. of the web page End of Procedure Disabling a card Follow Procedure 85 to disable a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager Procedure 85 Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager 1 Select System gt Maintenance from the navigator The Maintenance web page opens as shown in Figure 119 on page 344 This page allows you to perform maintenance using overlays or using a selected functionality The default is overlay as shown in Figure 119 Select Select by Functionality Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 348 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card The list in the web page changes to show a list of diagnostics you can use as shown in Figure 120 on page 345 3 Select Network amp Peripheral Equipment Diagnostics from the list in Figure 120 on page 345 The Network and Peripheral Diagnostics web page opens as shown in Figure 121 on page 346 4 Select the DISC Disable card command from the Card Commands drop down list 5 Enter the card number in the corresponding Command Parameter text box 6 Click Submit to the right of the text box The output from this command is shown in the text box in the lower half of the web page End of Procedure Note For graceful disabling of the voice gateway channels refer to Graceful Disable in JP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 Disabling a card unit Follow Procedur
254. oice gt b 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 135 of 488 The system verifies which customer databases are available on the RUD under directory backup and displays them You selected to transfer the default database from the System S W RMD onto the FMD from release 4300 to release 2507Q This will erase the database on the hard disk If you quit now the database will be left unchanged Please insert the System S W RMD into the drive if you are transferring the database Please enter Ka gt Continue with default database install Kq gt Quit Enter choice gt lt a gt 18 Continue with database installation Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool You selected to install Software release 0450C on the new system This will create all necessary directories and fpre allocate files on the hard disk You may continue with software install or quit mow and leave your software unchanged Please enter KCR gt gt lt a gt Continue with new system install lt q gt Quit The installation summary screen appears Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 136 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E INSTALLATION STATUS SUMMARY Peeeeeessseeseess aaan Option choice Status Comment k s222222 assesses assesses sssssssssssssssssseesee F S
255. on The IP Phone prompts DHCP 0 No 1 Yes 0 Enter 1 to use DHCP The IP Phone prompts DHCP 0 Full 1 Partial 0 Enter the 0 to use Full DHCP The IP Phone prompts VLAN 0 No 1 Ma 2 Au 0 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 429 of 488 6 Choose one of the following a Enter 0 to configure no VLAN The IP Phone displays Locating server After several seconds the IP Phone prompts Connect Svc Node x TN X X Go to step 7 on page 429 b Enter 1 to configure manual VLAN The IP Phone prompts VLAN x Go to step 7 c Enter 2 to configure automatic VLAN The IP Phone prompts VLAN x Go to step 7 7 Enter the VLAN ID The IP Phone displays Locating server If you did not configure an IP Phone Installer Password after several seconds the IP Phone prompts Node x TN X X 8 Enter the node number and the IP Phone s virtual TN and then go to step 11 on page 430 If you configured an IP Phone Installer Password the IP Phone prompts Node x PassWord 0 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration 10 11 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 430 of 488 Enter the node number and the temporary or administrator IP Phone Installer Password Note 1 An asterisk is displayed for each password digit entered the actual password is not displayed Note 2 lf this screen times out or if you do not successfu
256. on media gateway A w BL o w G w U Tati wiw olwia x lt 4mnv 553 CSE8343 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 444 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Figure 152 AUX cable connector on Media Gateway anes A ALS PS L CE Anun SF Table 56 Control and power connections on cable J1 Part 1 of 2 J1 Cable from QUA6 Function Pair Number Pair Color Connects to Cross connects to Control 1T W BL ALM Not used 1R BL W BRTN W BL 1 dot connection on AUX cable 2T W O PFTS W O 1 dot connection on AUX cable Transfer begins by applying ground to this lead 2R O W BRTN BL W 1 dot connection on AUX cable 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Table 56 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Control and power connections on cable J1 Part 2 of 2 Page 445 of 488 J1 Cable from QUA6 Function Pair Number Pair Color Connects to Cross connects to 3T W G TC Console transfer switch See console connections Transfer begins by applying ground to this lead 3R G W Not used 4T W BR Not used 4R BR W Not used PFTU 25T S V 48 V O W 1 dot connection on power 25R V S 48 V AUX cable Maximum 250 mA draw on O W lead Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 446 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfe
257. open Note The ELAN network interface MAC address must be configured in the Element Manager node configuration web page 16 To complete the installation the Installation Status Summary screen appears as shown in Figure 74 on page 194 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 194 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 74 Installation Status Summary firmware copy i2002 version 1 xx firmware copy i2004 version 1 xx firmware copy PhaseII IP Firmware version x xx loadware x xx xx for loadware Line x xx xx for Please press lt CR gt when ready 17 Press lt CR gt to exit to the Main Menu see Figure 56 on page 181 Enter q at the Main Menu to quit the installation process Figure 75 on page 195 appears Enter q again 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 195 of 488 Figure 75 Quit CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx You have selected to quit the Install Tool Before quitting and rebooting the system remove all disks floppy CDROM from the drives Please enter lt CR gt gt lt m gt Return to previous menu lt q gt Quit and reboot the system Enter Choice gt q 18 Remove the CD ROM from the drive and reboot the system Note After software installation and reboot a Follower Signaling Server sends out
258. ore on the password feature e Ifthe null node password is configured and enabled these screens are skipped and no option is provided to change the password e If the node password is disabled or not configured it prompts for a node number and TN Enter the node number and TN using the keyboard or numeric keypad The IP Softphone 2050 configuration is complete 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 439 of 488 Verifying IP Phone functionality You can now use the IP Phones To test the telephones make IP Phone to IP Phone calls Displaying registered IP Phones Follow Procedure 114 to display the IP Phones registered on a Signaling Server or Voice Gateway Media Card Procedure 114 Displaying registered IP Phones in Element Manager 1 Login to Element Manager 2 Select System Status gt IP Telephony from the navigator 3 Click the desired node to expand it 4 Click GEN CMD for the desired Signaling Server or Media Card a Select isetShow from the drop down list box b If prompted select the range of sets to display c Click RUN The status of all IP Phones registered on this Signaling Server or Media Card is displayed End of Procedure Upgrading firmware Refer to the JP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 to check for the latest IP Phone firmware version and how to upgrade to the latest IP Phone firmware Communication Server 1000
259. ork Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Installing the Main Distribution Frame Configuring an IP telephony node 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installation summary Page 39 of 488 Table 1 List of required installation tasks Part 2 of 2 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Installing and configuring IP Phones Installing and cross connecting a trunk card Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Basic system telephony configuration Configuring IP Peer Networking and managing the Gatekeeper database Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 40 of 488 Installation summary 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 41 of 488 System components Contents This section contains information on the following topics Modicon ser 2s cRESS SEREELE SCL ED KRERe DSR RE ALAM RE ES 41 CS Q00R Call Sever ccpcardi ee eee ee OOE EAA 42 Signaling SOME sareetan rie Aae eRe oak hee ORe dae eases s 45 MCHA 2 20 pe a0 tes Sestak t a degen aaaceeeeusesd 49 Dieta Lite way si4ee cee aud tee e ens een evonreveseers 51 Media Gateway Expander scs cccnessegosawnes e eoeriiduvis 57 19 imeh Rack Mount Kits uur saxcndsessendedearsiedniaendions 60 Baysak aye Swi pisnicaciieseiie
260. orted on MG 1000E Create 32 voice Media Gateway channels on a Media Card Voice Gateway TN of the first Voice Gateway Media Card unit See Table 40 on page 337 for TN assignments Description for gateway channels Identify the channels using the card s TLAN IP address or MAC address Media Card 32 port 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 329 of 488 Table 39 LD 14 Configure physical TNs Part 2 of 2 32 32 is the maximum number of voice Media Gateway channels on the Media Card 24 For MG 1000T when XTRK ITG2 24 is the maximum number of voice Media Gateway channels on the ITG P Line card ITG Physical TN MG 1000T Zone number to which the Voice Gateway Media Card Physical TNs belong Verify that the zone exists in LD 117 The ZONE prompt is not available when configuring VGW in an MG 1000E The VGWs are assigned the same zone as the MG 1000E Note f the Zone of an MG 1000E is changed all VGW in the MG 1000E must be removed and reconfigured to assume the new Zone of the MG 1000E The customer to which the IPTN resources are assigned Note This means that for multi customer CS 1000E systems each customer must have a dedicated IP Telephony node for IP Phones 4 Exit from LD 14 Enter the command KKK End of Procedure Saving configuration changes Perform a datadump to save configuration changes Complete the
261. oundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 Low boundary 0x7fcl High boundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 Low boundary 0x9ffcl High boundary 0xle8bdf fdiskPartCreate 0x12d5ff0c Size in sectors 0x98000 1 4 0x10 2 11 0x130 3 11 0x130 4 11 0x130 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 123 of 488 Low boundary 0x137fc1 High boundary 0xle8bdf gt Fix Media Device repartition completed gt Formatting FMD Mounting msdos fs boot on dev hdal fdiskDevCreate dev hdal1 dev hdal partTablePtr 0x12d5ff0c Found partition 1 nodePtr 0x12d30a4c Partition 1 type MSDOS FAT16 lt 32MB cbioPtr Ox131eb2e8 Initializing new slave device 0x131leb2e8 Retrieved old volume params with 95 confidence Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 32 2 FAT copies 0 clusters 245 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 1 hidden 63 FAT sectors 490 Root dir entries 512 sysId null serial number 3b69lafd Label NO NAME Disk with 32705 sectors of 512 bytes will be formatted with Volume Parameters FAT type FAT16 sectors per cluster 2 2 FAT copies 16240 clusters 64 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 1 hidden 63 FAT sectors 128 Root dir entries 512 sysId VXDOS16 serial number 3b69lafd Communication Server 1000E
262. ounding a Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel Follow Procedure 8 to ground one or more Media Gateway powered by the same electrical panel Procedure 8 Grounding Media Gateways powered by the same electrical panel 1 2 Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet Install a 6 AWG ground wire from the ground lug as shown in Figure 27 on page 97 at the back of the Media Gateway to the ground bar Place a DO NOT DISCONNECT tag on the ground wire 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Figure 27 Installing system grounds Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander ground lug location Page 97 of 488 Ground wire to ground bar Media Gateway to Media Gateway Expander ground lugs Ground wire tie wrap lug 4 Test the ground End of Procedure Grounding a Media Gateway powered by multiple electrical panels Follow Procedure 9 on page 98 to ground multiple Media Gateway that are powered by multiple electrical panels Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 98 of 488 Installing system grounds Procedure 9 Grounding Media Gateways powered by multiple electrical panels 1 Disconnect the AC power cord from the power outlet 2 Identify the electrical panel powering each component 3 Install a ground bar for each electrical panel identified above Note Each component must be grounded to the electrical panel that provides the power to that
263. out IP Address 47 11 1437 Type a Networks Communication Server 1000E Version 3321 Release 4500 Redundancy State REDUNDANT cp 0 ACTIVE HEALTH 20 CPU and Health State 4 STANDBY HEALTH 20 Backup Archives Last Backup Archive Not Available Status Not Available Backup Archive Initiation Not Available Signaling Server Web Server Users Logged into this Signaling Server Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 220 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server 1 Select Configuration gt IP Telephony from the navigator The Node Summary web page appears No nodes are defined 2 Import the Node files from the leader Signaling Server a Click Import Node Files on the Node Summary web page The Import Node Files screen in Figure 78 on page 220 appears b Enter the ELAN IP address of the leader Signaling Server in the input box Figure 78 Import Node Files Retrieve and upgrade configuration files Managing 47 11 143 7 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Confiquration Import Node Files Import Node Files P Management LAN ELAN IP address ofthe leader from where to retrieve the a node files meon Click a button to invoke a command Cancel 3 Click Import A success message appears 4 Click OK to go to the next procedure End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 221 of 48
264. ovisioned is adequate to provide the acceptable blocking level of the resources in the MG 1000E Refer to the Communication Server 1000E Planning and Engineering 553 3041 120 for details Configuring the MG 1000E ports IP addresses must be configured on the Call Server for each MG 1000E in the system Use LD 97 to configure the MG 1000E ports LD 97 Configuring the MG 1000E ports Part 1 of 2 Response Comment CHG Change existing data SUPL Superloop 0 4 8 252 Superloop number lt cr gt Select default IPMG MG 1000E XX XX XX XX IP address of the first MG 1000E Uplink IP address lt cr gt to skip to IPR1 when configuring new superloop Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 214 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server LD 97 Configuring the MG 1000E ports Part 2 of 2 Response Comment First MG 1000E zone number First MG 1000E Virtual conference circuit starting loop number Two consecutive VXCTs are assigned The VXCTs must be previously configured in LD 17 Where 0 252 x 0 means 1 TDS loop only x 1 means 1 TDS loop and 1 conference loop x 2 means 2 TDS loops and 2 conference loops x 3 means 2 TDS loops and 3 conference loops x 4 means 2 TDS loops and 4 conference loops Precede with X to remove XX XX XX XX IP address of second MG 1000E cabinet uplink IP address lt cr gt to skip to IPR2 when configuring new superloop 0 255 Second MG 100
265. ow these precautions when handling circuit cards 1 Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors transformers or similar machinery Handle cards by the edges only Do not touch the contacts or components Set cards on a protective antistatic bag If an antistatic bag is not available hold the card or set it in a card slot unseated Store cards in protective packing Do not stack cards on top of each other unless they are packaged Wear a properly connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on the equipment 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Safety instructions Page 35 of 488 Installing telephones Follow these safety instructions when installing telephone equipment Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install a telephone jack in wet locations unless the jack is designed for wet locations Never touch an uninsulated telephone wire or terminal unless the telephone line is disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Using telephones These safety precautions are intended to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and personal injury Always follow these basic safety precautions when using telephone equipment Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Before you clean a telephone remove the plug from the wall outlet Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Do no
266. p where data is dumped only on the MG 1000T Core The databases on the Survivable Media Gateways are not updated This operation is used when the database changes are tested by the technician prior to downloading them to the Survivable Media Gateways The sequence of operations for the EDD LCL command is as follows Prior to an actual dump the MG 1000T Core performs a security check If the security check fails the datadump operation is aborted If the security check passes the existing database files on the primary flash drive are renamed with the extension bak The data is then written to the primary flash drive When the database files in the primary flash drive are updated data and patches are written to the internal backup flash drive z 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 467 of 488 Note LD 43 and LD 143 are not available on an MG 1000T Expansion in Survival Mode SWP RES RIB and DAT commands for survivability To ensure the database synchronization on the MG 1000T Core and the Survivable MG 1000T Expansion s the Swap SWP Restore RES and Restore Backup RIB commands are modified to produce the same results on the Survivable MG 1000T Expansion s as on the MG 1000T Core The optional parameter lt cab gt enables the technician to select a specific MG 1000T Expansion If no parameter is provided the command is first perform
267. phone lines Do not install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Do not install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are designed for wet locations Never touch un insulated telephone wiring unless the line is disconnected at the network interface 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Figure 154 Analog Line card cable distribution Page 449 of 488 Cable pairs Line Pack Lead designation W BL T BL W R w 0 T o W R wW G T G W pR W BR T BR W R W S T S W R R BL T BL R R R O O R R R G T G R R R BR T BR R R R S T S R R BK BL T BL BK pR BK O 0 BK R BK G T G BK R BK BR T BR BK R BK S ry S BK R Y BL T BL Y _R Cross connect To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone To 500 2500 type telephone 553 8349 EPS Communication Server 1000E Installation and Config
268. port 7 End of Procedure Configuring a transparent rlogin port The CS 1000E system uses Pseudo TTY PTY ports as TTY ports All serial applications such as CDR and Traffic can be implemented through PTY ports PTY ports are configured in LD 17 An external device such as a printer can access a Call Server PTY port through the Terminal Server by using a remote login rlogin session Using HyperTerminal follow Procedure 66 to configure a transparent rlogin port Procedure 66 Configuring a transparent rlogin port 1 Enable keepalive timer 1 for the port Enter the command DEFINE PORT XX IP TCP KEEPALIVE TIMER 1 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server Page 261 of 488 Where xx port number 2 Enable a dedicated service using rlogin Enter the command DEFINE PORT XX RLOGIN DEDICATED SERVICE XX XX XX XX Where xx port number xx xx xx xx port IP address 3 Enable the port to be accessible only by local command and from a serial connection only Enter the command DEFINE PORT xx ACCESS LOCAL Where xx port number 4 Enable the In Reach Element Manager to complete a ZMODEM transfer using the rlogin feature Enter the command DEFINE PORT xx RLOGIN TRANSPARENT MODE ENABLED Where xx port number Note 1 When the rlogin transparent mode is enabled characters are passed raw without interpretation and transparently within
269. power disconnect must be installed The main AC power disconnect must e disconnect power to the entire rack unit e be readily accessible e be labeled as controlling power to the entire unit not just to the Signaling Server s 1 Attach the rack mount brackets B as shown in Figure 19 on page 83 to the equipment rack Install the left and right side at an equal height Use standard length screws from the accessories pouch and screw them into the top and bottom drill holes of the bracket see Figure 24 on page 88 Figure 24 Installed rack mount bracket to 2 When both brackets are fixed in place a Align the rack mount brackets on the Signaling Server with the slide rail system on the rack posts b Slide the Signaling Server in place Refer to Figure 25 on page 89 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 89 of 488 Figure 25 Rack mounting the Signaling Server 3 Tighten the screws through the faceplate of the Signaling Server to the rack mount bracket Note Do not apply excessive torque while tightening the bolts The bezel door is plastic and does not require or withstand overtightening End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 90 of 488 Rack mounting the components Rack mounting a Terminal Server Follow the manufacturer s instructions to rack mount this equipment Rack mounting a BayStack 470 Switch Follow t
270. r lt CR gt gt lt a gt H 323 Gatekeeper and SIP Redirect Proxy Server lt b gt H 323 Gatekeeper only lt c gt SIP Redirect Proxy Server only Enter Choice gt 12 Select the type of NRS to be provided by this Signaling Server See Figure 66 for a co resident Signaling Server See Figure 67 on page 189 for a stand alone Signaling Server e If this Signaling Server is to be the Primary NRS enter a e If this Signaling Server is to be the Alternate NRS enter b e If this Signaling Server is not a stand alone Signaling Server and is to be the Failsafe NRS enter c Refer to P Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 for more information on the NRS Figure 66 NRS type co resident Signaling Server CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please select the type of Network Routing Service NRS for this Signaling Server Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Primary lt b gt Alternate lt c gt Failsafe Enter Choice gt 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 189 of 488 Figure 67 NRS type stand alone Signaling Server CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please select the type of Network Routing Service NRS for this Signaling Server Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Primary lt b gt Alternate Enter
271. r 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 341 of 488 Figure 116 Node Maintenance and Reports expanded node Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Maintenance and Reports Node Maintenance and Reports Node ID 8 Index ELAN IP Node IP 192 168 253 7 Total elements 3 TN ELAN Signaling Server NOTN GEN CMD RPT LOG OMRPT Reset Virtual Terminal Status 4 207 179 153 109 ITG Pentium 13 0 GENCMD SYSLOG OMRPT Reset virtual Terminai Status GEN CMD SYS LOG OMRPT Reset Virtual Terminal Status Type NODES 207 179 153 100 Succession 2 207 179 153 111 Media Card 120 Click buttons to invoke a command 3 Click Status for the desired Voice Gateway Media Card The output from this command is displayed in the window pane result box The output can be one of the following XX XXX XXX XXX Disabled XX XXX XXX XXX Enabled XX XXX XXX XXX Unequipped Where xx xxx xxx xxx is the ELAN IP address of the Voice Gateway Media Card and the meaning of the status is e Disabled The card is configured but out of service e Enabled The card is configured and operational e Unequipped The card is not configured in the Call Server End of Procedure Procedure 82 Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels 1 In Element Manager select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Maintenance an
272. r Unit Figure 153 Power fail transfer 553 CSE8343 End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Page 447 of 488 Installing and connecting a third party PFTU Follow the equipment manufacturer s instructions for installing the PFTU Use the information in Table 57 to connect a third party PFTU Table 57 PFTU control lead signals NTAK1104 AUX cable lead BRTN Lead State When PFTU is in non transferred state GROUND When PFTU is in transferred state GROUND BRTN GROUND GROUND 48V AUX 48V DC 250 mA max 48V DC 250 mA max PFTS OPEN GROUND Note 1 Refer to Figure 152 on page 444 to see where the Auxiliary cable connects to the CS 1000E system Note 2 If power is removed from the QUA6 a transfer of the PFTU can occur Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 448 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone to a PFTU Ensure that the cable from the appropriate Line card slot has been connected to the telephone Refer to Installing the Main Distribution Frame on page 353 Follow Procedure 116 to connect an analog telephone to a PFTU Refer to the equipment layout plan to determine where to locate the PFTU DANGER Always use caution when installing or modifying tele
273. r components can be configured using the web based Element Manager interface Refer to Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 Signaling Server Software CD ROM If you do not have the latest version of the CD ROM e Order or download the CD ROM image from the Nortel Electronic Software Download site See Procedure 42 for instructions on downloading the image e Create the Install Tool CD ROM from the image See Procedure 43 on page 171 A single iso file is provided to create the Software CD ROM This file is a ready to burn ISO9660 CD image that creates a bootable CD that complies to the El Torito specification You must use CD writer software that can create a CD from this image As the CD image is preconfigured your software automatically creates a bootable CS 1000 Release 4 5 CD ROM See your software help pages to create a CD from an ISO file Also review the associated README file that is associated with the Nortel Signaling Server Software download Procedure 42 Downloading the Signaling Server CD image 1 Connect to the Nortel website at www nortel com 2 Navigate to the Software Downloads page 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 171 of 488 3 a Click Software Downloads in the Support amp Training menu The Technical Support page appears Click Product Families The Products Families list appears Click Succession The By Pr
274. r sneered eewewen 17 About this document 00 2c eee ees 29 SUMICC cw sion SL EEEE N TSE T 29 Applicable SyS e erriaren nt ROER R EERS 30 E ol CEEE EAEI AEST TAAA TA TRETE 30 Related mformatiom s r yssdri ierti ae orr EE EEE OEE EA 30 Safety instructions 00e eee eee 33 COMES A Sais KOE REE SRR E E he HERS RRR ES 33 e aena EA E NTT TA TE E AS E 33 Liting system equipment asnes sdsiwsieeeeeeiwnsaaeesd es 34 Handling circuit cards rocrieiriinrsrcaucii riri Peers aesees 34 Jostalline telephneS sreci koerier eS 33 Vsine tiepe earair a eaea rk 39 Installation summary 22000ee eens 37 220 es Se ee ee aT Ee O EIE EA AEII AET RETER SAE TEETE TE 37 Pnstallanon taski sanee recreere rin ae ee ERA EEA 38 System components 200eeeeeeee 41 COMES cs 2 5 Gone KDE RES R ERR RRR ENR ENS r ERA 41 DOU BCO GD 520s pain kee ee heh SAAR REIL AE CONSE ER ES 41 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 6 of 488 Contents CS 1000F Call Sever ce crcicedocunecdba ts gar nd Paw eewa aces Backup and restore enhancements s o00 is ceiscaoeiicerisaeeias New baehip Miles 23 ursarscandiweniseee sebehew eed een rans ra SOIC bt ia inhale ceded wR Mee ea samen ad tee ie TETE Medo oat cee ie ee eed cet dda eda eh ERER Media GIRWAF Lica cloessrees gees ica eeleeesiscedimeenscad Media Gateway EXp ndof scccdgcs gee cdedeas eae cbedersea eases men Rack MOON 1236686 deddct ede sk oddtaweeen bikr Bagster TO Ses ceti
275. r step 12 on page 188 If b was entered in step 12 enter the address of the Primary NRS See Figure 71 on page 192 fawas entered in step 12 you can enter the address of the Alternate NRS if you know it but it is not required See Figure 72 on page 192 If c was entered in step 12 Enter the address of the Primary NRS See Figure 71 Enter the address of the Alternate NRS See Figure 72 If d was entered in step 11 Enter the address of the Primary NRS optional See Figure 71 Ifyou did enter the address of the Primary NRS enter the address of the Alternate NRS also optional See Figure 72 The Gatekeeper configuration can be updated later using Element Manager Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 192 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Figure 71 Primary NRS IP address CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please enter the Primary NRS IP Address Primary NRS IP Figure 72 Alternate NRS IP address CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx Please enter the Alternate NRS IP Address Alternate NRS IP 15 Enter y to confirm the parameters See Figure 73 on page 193 The example in Figure 73 is for a Leader Signaling Server configured with an Alternate H 323 and SIP NRS The confirmation screens for a Follower and stand alone Signaling Server are similar showing the same list of
276. re runs for the first time on a new system the hard disk will not be partitioned so the test normally fails Upon failure the menu in Figure 50 appears Figure 50 First boot of a new system CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx The filesystems verification failed This is normal for a new system The hard disk must be re partitioned and re initialized This will erase all data on the hard disk The system will then reboot and the Install Tool will restart Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt Partition and initialize the hard disk then reboot Enter Choice gt a a Enter ato start the new installation The system displays the messages Partitioning hard disk Hard disk partitioning succeeded Creating filesystems Filesystems creation succeeded Rebooting system b The Install Tool banner screen Figure 49 on page 175 reappears Press lt CR gt to verify the filesystems The disk check reports Filesystems verification succeeded c Confirm or enter the date and time Figure 51 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Page 177 of 488 Figure 51 Date and time CS 1000 Signaling Server Software Install Tool sse x xx xx You should ensure the system date and time are correct prior to installation since all files copied or created during install will be time stamped You can press lt C
277. reaeteswereeer eared 61 BayStack 460 Layer 2 SWIC 4 ciavcarwe asad eese eee adios 63 MRY Tein SEVO oc o y seguaweberwatinwniadasianieened 63 Pe th oe heen dee ee ea ee i eed eee eee HES 65 Syste CADIS ih shoe ee Ree R Eee RES SORTER ROO EA 65 Miscellaneous system components 0 0 00 0 02 eee eee 69 Uninitenupible Power Supply 2ciecvacdeeakeeouleqeas rene bes 70 Introduction The CS 1000E system consists of the following components e Call Server e Signaling Server Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 42 of 488 System components Media Card Media Gateway Media Gateway Expander BayStack 470 Switch MRV Terminal Server System cables Note You must order the power cord specified for your region The system uses the following customer supplied components BayStack 460 Layer 2 switch 19 inch rack Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS CS 1000E Call Server CAUTION Damage to Equipment The CS 1000E Call Server chassis is constructed of light weight aluminum It can be damaged if the unit is lifted from the shipping box by its top plate The CS 1000E uses a Call Processor Pentium IV CP PIV processor for CS 1000 Release 4 5 It features the following enhancements a PCI based design an Intel Pentium IV processor two Compact Flash CF sockets one on board and one hot swappable on the faceplate 512 MBytes of DRAM memory The Call Server is shown in Figure on page 43 an
278. red LD 17 Add Virtual Tone and Conference loops Response Comment Change existing data Common Equipment Add a Virtual Tone and Conference Circuit Where x X 0 2 6 158 It is recommended that Virtual Tone and Conference loops start as a multiple of 4 and be configured as even loops thereafter i e 60 62 64 66 Virtual Tone and Conference loops in the same MG 1000E must occupy adjacent double loops 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 211 of 488 Configuring the MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zones Follow Procedure 52 for configuring bandwidth management zones Procedure 52 Configuring MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zone 1 Enter LD 117 and press lt cr gt 2 Enter NEW ZONE 0 to create a new zone with default parameters Note LD 117 also includes DIS and ENL commands to disable or enable a zone When you create a zone its default state is enabled See LD 117 Bandwidth management zone commands on page 212 3 Print zone and bandwidth information using PRT INTRAZONE or PRT INTERZONE 4 Exit from LD 117 by entering the commana Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 212 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server LD 117 Bandwidth management zone commands Command Description NEW ZONE xxx p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 Create a new zone where xxx zone number 0 255 p1 Intrazone available bandwidth 0
279. rogress in ascending order Follow Procedure 50 to configure pseudo terminals Procedure 50 Configuring pseudo terminals PTYs Nortel recommends that at least two PTYs be configured A maximum of four PTYs can be allocated on a CS 1000E system 1 Enter the command LD 17 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 208 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server System response CFN000 MEM AVAIL U P 1019254 USED U P 138012 22381 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 491 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 2 Enter the command REQ CHG 3 Enter the command TYPE CFN 4 Enter the command ADAN NEW TTY lt x gt Where lt x gt an available TTY number 0 15 5 Enter the command TTY_TYPE PTY 6 Enter the command PORT lt y gt Where lt y gt an available PTY port 0 7 7 Enter the command DES lt z gt Where lt z gt designator for example ether 1 8 Enter the command FLOW NO 9 Enter the command USER MTC BUG SCH 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 209 of 488 10 Enter the command TTYLOG NO 11 Enter the command BANR YES System response MEM AVAIL OT 3555327 ECS AVAIL 491 AML AVAIL ADAN DATA SAVED U P 1019130 USED U P 138064 22453 HANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT
280. ros BEIT OON Cable Cara 4 GEE Coro Ott Media Gateway Expansion OON cable Card7 OA COON Cable Caras O OON Cable Card9 ETT OON Cable Card 10 OOA Cor eru nunn annn mnnnn ranan waman C Coco Co Corr Telephones OTT Trunk CE mec CORI Miscellaneous COCO 553 CSE9026A Communication Server 1000E End of Procedure Installation and Configuration Page 356 of 488 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK The Krone Test Jack Frame provides terminating strips that hold ten pairs of cable Generally only eight of ten pairs are used As a result one 25 pair cable requires three terminating strips 8 pairs strip x 3 strips 24 pairs Figure 123 on page 357 shows how one 25 pair cable is divided among three terminating strips on the Krone Test Jack Frame 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing the Main Distribution Frame Page 357 of 488 Figure 123 25 pair cable on three Krone strips Pair Pin Number Wire Colour Krone Strip 1T 26 W BL 1R 1 BL W 2T 27 W O 2R 2 O W 3T 28 W G 3R 3 G W 4T 29 W BR 1 4R 4 BR W 5T 30 W S 5R 5 S W 6T 31 R BL 6R 6 BL R 7T 32 R O 7R 7 O R 8T 33 R G 8R 8 G R 9T 34 R BR 9R 9 BR R 10T 35 R S 10R 10 S R 11T 36 BK BL 11R 14 BL BK 12T 37 BK O 2 12R 12 O BK 13T 38 BK G 13R 13 G BK 14T 39 BK BR 14R 14 BR BK 15T 40 BK S 15R 15 S BK 16T 41 Y BL
281. rs 50115 sectors per FAT Sectors reserved 15421 hidden 1010580541 IFAT sectors 3057015 Root dir entries 15421 sysId null serial number cffbc3c3 Label 7 CPP4 reboot automatically Mounting cf2 Found cf2 nvram sys Mounting boot Found boot nvram sys Selecting nvram file from 2 sources Read boot parameters from F Faceplate compact flash H Hard Drive 0 H Reading boot parameters from boot nvram sys Press any key to stop auto boot Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 126 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 6 The system then enters the Main Menu for keycode authorization MAIN MENU The Software Installation Tool will install or upgrade Communication Server 1000 Software Database and the CP BOOTROM You will be prompted throughout the installation and given the opportunity to quit at any time Please enter KCR gt gt lt u gt To Install menu lt t gt To Tools menu lt q gt Quit Enter Choice gt lt u gt The system searches for available keycode files in the keycode directory on the RMD If no keycode file is found the system displays the following menu Communication Server 1000 Software Database BOOTROM RMD Install Tool No keycode files are available on the removable media Please replace the RMD containing the keycode file s Please enter lt CR gt gt
282. rsal Trunk card connections s e cco ences cadens daeie a 299 E amp M Trink card connects ac i e ac eee e euretan ei 298 Think connections EUr i420 ciasne irekian thine ERROREA 300 Trunk connections UR j coc sandtwageewkeeeeabaee hos teead ewe 310 Wentyng tunk functionality s 24 54 senutecosiwons eu sesd eau sens 318 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card 5 319 CODING as 6 c0tb shine eiahe dees giebweestuddorweadiaa tees 319 aea n o s02 ccosiieeak chee Lieed dees eee TTET 320 COnN AEM 262 chon keg ARK SEER RAR RES HERA REO KES 321 Adding a card to an IP telephony node ses 264 esseeanseeednws 321 Configuring a card asa node Leader co ios40ssieeescceneedensaee I2 Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager S25 Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 327 Savmg COMMUNION changes 5 0 ki edeckadcioeideiestawersees 329 Installing a CompactFlash s cen isaeddeanetadaciereraaken vans 330 Installing a card in a Media Gateway 0 0008 335 WOHIVINS PCM A A ETATE 339 Ee e ae n EAEE TETES TEETE ETI TENTE TT 347 Disabling a Cad U eraa eau eOr PRE rE EE 348 PaO ae eceran aR ERED 349 Enapling a card niil nice eee kee edaeeegdaVeedegeeaus saan Kee 350 Veni vine MOCHA ac owe Cds ee dese deed TETERE FE ESE 331 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 12 of 488 Contents Upgrading JOGdWalS sci daid brew edad ad are eee ae ee wae Raed 351 In
283. rt emershaers komiakagdanes cae 441 TNCUMCUION 1503s kde ee bike oi ene ee eewa seed ace a a 441 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU 442 Installing and connecting a third party PFTU 447 Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone toa PFTU 448 Connecting a think toa PFT ccccacscc eeseneieteens bans es 452 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 14 of 488 Contents Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU 455 CONES yi n6544 tbs eke KHER SERA LEER ARNON EAS ERESS ES 455 AOL eii RETE ode EEEL ETTET EE ETE 455 Installing an alarm using an alarm port assigned in LD 15 456 Installing an alarm through QUA6 PFTU connections 457 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller saaanannnnnnnnnnnn 461 CEE sepiro rrt oe Sd Saree Ee RE EERS 461 Tinoduc i perapan pirika keke lake lk eee ENE 461 MG 1000T switch over to Survival Mode 00005 462 Switchback from Survival Mode 20 00 00 4cc0eeesen ee eeneee es 464 LOCK and UNLOCK commands 2 5 00ic0e0s0nen AN eR EaR 465 Database syrchtoni Zann 2 2 g440s ek dceeind veo saree ese snes a 466 Configuring a survivable MG 1000T Expansion 472 Printing Survivable MG 1000T Expansion parameters 473 Configuring Alternate primary controller 0 473 Verifying IP telephony node operation
284. rvivable MG 1000T Expansion The MG 1000T Core can be connected to a maximum of four MG 1000T Expansions Figure 38 on page 157 shows the location of the two NTDK83 Dual Port Daughterboards with port assignments The MG 1000T uses daughterboard 2 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 157 of 488 Figure 38 CS 1000T SSC a a NTDK57AA NT_STD Security Device NTM400 Software daughterboard ert aT NTDK83 dual port Factory installed 100BaseT IP daughterboard 1 Fi NTDK83 dual port Optional 100BaseT K IP daughterboard 2 NTDUOG6O06 Ethernet cable for ports 1 and 2 Standard or NTTK34AA cross over cable for ports 3 and 4 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 158 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Procedure 34 Connecting the MG 1000T Core to an MG 1000T Expansion 1 Choose one of the following a For point to point 100BaseT connectivity go to step 2 b For 100BaseT connectivity over a distributed Campus Data Network go to step 9 on page 159 2 For the MG 1000T Core connect port 1 of the SSC 100BaseT daughterboard 1 to the bulkhead connector 1 shown in Figure 39 on page 159 Note 1 Ifthe SSC cable is connected to bulkhead Port 1 then use Port 1 on the back of the Media Gateway If the SSC cable is connected to bulkhead Port 2 then use Port 2 on the back of the Media Gateway Note 2 Port 1 on the MG 10
285. s must match those corresponding to the site s keycodes AUX ID Note The Software Installation Program does not check the prerequisites and interactions of added packages Enter the AUX ID using the Software Installation Program For new CS 1000E sites the AUX ID is the system security ID Customer database The Software Installation Program enables an administrator to install a customer database from one of the following sources Preconfigured database The Software Delivery card can include several preconfigured databases and their associated feature sets In addition a minimal database is provided containing basic system configuration information with no customer data Archived database The Software Installation Program enables the archiving of various databases which can be used later at CS 1000E sites It also enables multiple databases to be configured off site and then installed ready to use at customer sites Off site programming of databases is subject to all security keycode restrictions The off site system must either use the Security Device that is installed in the CS 1000E system at the customer site or must have its own keycodes for the feature set used Remote restored database A database can be restored remotely using the LD 143 CCBR remote restore command Backed up database This option enables the copy on the backup flash drive to be installed It is provided to recover a customer database if t
286. s u pattern provides adequate clearance between components For example a Media Gateway Expander could be installed in the next 5u pattern of mounting holes below an already installed Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 74 of 488 Rack mounting the components Media Gateway The Media Gateway Expander would be approximately 1 4 in from the Media Gateway it Note Inthe 5u pattern a u is equal to 1 75 in and includes three holes spaced at 5 8 in 5 8 in 1 2 in Other data communications equipment can be installed in a rack with CS 1000E system components IMPORTANT Ensure that the unit s power cord is appropriate for the area s electrical service Do not modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the correct type This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 1 Rack mounting a CS 1000E Call Server on page 77 e Procedure 2 Removing the cover on page 78 e Procedure 3 Rack mounting a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expander on page 80 e Procedure 4 Preparing a Signaling Server for rack mounting on page 83 e Procedure 5 Rack mounting a Signaling Server on page 86 Lifting system components Exercise care when lifting system components If necessary get assistance to lift a component or install components in a rack Table 11 on page 75 lists the CS 1000E system components provided by Nortel and the weight of each 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00
287. sert a CF card into the active Call Server RMD slot to back up the database 3 Load the Equipment Data Dump Program LD 43 At the prompt enter LD 43 Load program EDD 4 When EDDOOO appears on the terminal enter EDD Begin the data dump CAUTION Service Interruption Loss of Data If the data dump is not successful do not continue contact your technical support organization A data dump problem must be corrected before proceeding Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 152 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 5 When DATADUMP COMPLETE and DATABASE BACKUP COMPLETE appear on the terminal enter at Exit program The installation is now complete End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 153 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics INR CIMEON ern E E E E TEST ESEE nie TENT 153 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to a Survivable MG 1000T Expansion 156 Connecting an MG 1000T Core to the ELAN subnet 161 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet 162 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 163 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter onto a MEM AC ncecewedeike Giese obs eeb eee RsIeeeaex 163 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN 00 08 165 Connecting a Media Card t
288. set to NO the MG 1000T remains in Survival Mode until a technician enters the SBFS command 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 465 of 488 Switchover Timer The timer is started on a Survivable MG 1000T as soon as the IP link with the primary controller goes up or down When the timer expires the switchover or switchback is triggered The timer is used to avoid instability in the Operating Mode of the MG 1000T Expansion if the IP link with the primary controller is unstable The Switchover Timer is also used during the start up of a Survivable MG 1000T Expansion The timer enables the MG 1000T Expansion to go into Survival Mode when it cannot connect to the primary controller on system start up When the IP link is restored for an MG 1000T Expansion in Survival Mode with AUTOSB configured the SWOTO timer is started If the timer expires a switchback is initiated to change from Survival Mode to Normal Mode If the IP link is detected as down again before the expiration of the SWOTO timer the timer stops and the MG 1000T remains in Survival operating mode Manual Switchback from Survival Mode After the SOTS command has been successfully executed the MG 1000T Expansion remains in Survival Mode until the Switchback From Survival SBFS command in LD 135 is issued LOCK and UNLOCK commands The LOCK and UNLOCK commands are available from the MG 1000T
289. shed and voice is disabled c Ifthe Port LEDs are green the link and voice is established 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Verifying the network Page 285 of 488 Figure 95 Media Gateways SSC faceplate Port LEDs an Care gt yin m0203 3 Observe bootup system messages on system terminals SRPT017 OMM IP link is UP between cab 0 and cab 1 SRPT017 OMM IP link is UP between cab 0 and cab 2 SRPT017 OMM IP link is UP between cab 0 and cab 3 SRPT017 OMM IP link is UP between cab 0 and cab 4 4 Login to the CS 1000E a Enter the command LOGI System response PASS b Enter the default password 0000 5 Access LD 135 Enter the command LD 135 6 Display status of 100BaseT links Enter the command STAT IPL System response Media Gateway 1 LINK UP Media Gateway 2 LINK UP Media Gateway 3 LINK UP Media Gateway 4 LINK UP Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 286 of 488 Verifying the network 7 Exit from LD 135 Enter the command kkk 8 Access LD 117 Enter the comman LD 117 9 Ping IP addresses on the 100Base a Enter the command PING 192 168 0 11 System response PING 192 168 0 11 SUCCI b Enter the command PING 192 168 0 21 System response PING 192 168 0 21 SUCCI c Enter the command PING 192 168 0 31 System response PING 192 168 0 31 SUCCI d Enter the command PING 192 168 0 41 System response PING 192 168 0 41 SUCCI
290. sodyateuewss 267 setting the TTY termal portsss caer eeiscadiveesesseseieya 268 Traditional terminal SDI Connechon nis eses dee taveaycoaaiiwss 268 CS 1000E Core Call Server SDI connection sr 255scceccscnesawe 269 MG 1000E SDI Connection wo 60 50 vscs Geass ees eeedreeueses 270 NG 1000T SDI COnneChOn iain Sister dew sega ede ewe eae 270 Signaling Server SDI connection s cceriesrireriredrrti toiki 243 BayStack 470 SDI connection 2 04 0s s00sed nese genve dian as 274 Media Card SDI connecti io5 dc coe itest dongs eetiseeedcan 274 Verifying the network 220eeeeeee 277 CONN c ctagehi Gut eegi siete tueeeou le haut reeks seek see 217 Ditoto Ca ne ee ee ee ee 277 Checking the status of the ELAN network interfaces 278 Checking the statua or the HSP ports ii000sg244iceeesrenensees 282 Checking the status of the MG 1000T 100BaseT links 283 Checking MG 1000T trunking functionality 287 Establish CS 1000E DID calls from MG 1000T 287 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Contents Page 11 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a trunk card 289 COMES 0 66 Sack eed eed eee bee dt ee eI SOI SSSR SERS 289 WRPOONCHON xe c5 oie cco Gee R EAE E EE TIERS IAAT STORE 289 CUCU CAL opos 662544 e obeys eebareandawas see dwsasasened 293 Digital monk CANES oes veoh ke test eed wens thant oes 293 Connecting a HUNK owe ies eee enee wen eeewhes eo eerdeweoins 294 Unive
291. st not be more than 0 25 Ohm End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 102 of 488 Installing system grounds 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 103 of 488 Connecting CS 1000E system components Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics rodicio es cs pede ee ttebeees eee eo heew estes week we dows 103 Connecting Call Server 0 to Call Server 1 2 ck ev eus erivs eee ews 104 Connecting the CS 1000E Core Call Servers to an MG 1000E 106 Connecting a Signaling Server to the ELAN subnet 111 Connecting a Signaling Server to the TLAN subnet 112 Inserting a Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter Ontos Media Card 6620 taetdeterdine asawonsadeed cas 113 Connecting a Media Card to the ELAN subnet 114 Connecting a Media Card to the TLAN subnet 115 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 116 Several system connections are required to make the CS 1000E operational The CS 1000E must be connected to the MG 1000E through the ELAN subnet The Media Gateway are directly connected to the Media Gateway Expander The system s components such as the Signaling Server and the Media Cards installed in the Media Gateway require both ELAN subnet and TLAN subnet connections Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 104 of 488 Connectin
292. stalling the Main Distribution Frame 353 CONO i5 ona boleu neta he hehe ouster eos cedees 353 Piena e e o EEA E ANE AATE A A A ET NT 333 Terminal block reqmirements 1 5 c 0cwsseudeseaesswessawde ines 354 Installing a BIX cross connect terminal 2 5 400600 ca were setae 354 Installing a Krone Test Jack Frame for the UK 356 Connecting the cables to the Media Gateways 360 Configuring an IP telephony node 365 COGS te beriens ban betdeik cian ekde in Cee he E T 365 MWCO 6 oer Gd CLS SLoLEGPAL ee VSL he odes hiked Mave 365 Poron Vou MEO ik pekeeideieryasedhe EARANN AREN 366 Configuring MS Internet Explorers crrercrsireresrtidiiredrut 367 Logeme into Element Manager ci i sccce niwsedratawente 370 Importing preconfigured IP telephony files 372 Reviewing and submitting IP telephony node configuration files 374 Adding a Follower Signaling Server to an IP telephony node 379 Periorming adadi P ercran repareare EOR 380 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones 4 383 EEA iss e vis eee ake ewe genes E eee tae eters 383 PAO os 6k Ss hee SS Pee ARSE aE Rhea REE 383 Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expansion 386 Lross connecting telephones ag2 sccssengs ceed csegarseedbees 386 Connecting a telephone without a PFTU s 0s0s 2scisea cee 388 Connecting an off premise telephone s 24 05 c 0ces serene eden
293. stem S W version xxxx Please enter lt CR gt gt lt y gt Yes this is the correct version Continue lt n gt No this is not the correct version Try another RMD or a different keycode Enter choice gt lt CR gt Note If the RMD contains the correct software release select option lt y gt Yes this is the correct version Continue or simply press lt CR gt to continue If the software release is not correct and you want to replace the RMD insert the correct RMD in the drive and then press lt cR gt If you 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software onthe CS 1000E Page 131 of 488 want to replace the keycode select option lt n gt No this is not the correct version Choose lt y gt Yes Do the Dependency Lists installation for the Dependency Lists installation Do you want to install Dependency Lists Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes Do the Dependency Lists installation lt n gt No Continue without Dependency Lists installation Enter choice gt y Are you sure Please enter KCR gt gt lt n gt No Go to the Dependency List menu lt y gt Yes Go to the next menu Enter choice gt y gt Processing the install control file gt Installing release xxxx Enable Automatic Centralized Software Upgrade CSU Feature Default YES Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes lt n gt No
294. steps in Procedure 97 Performing a datadump using Element Manager on page 380 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 330 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Installing a CompactFlash The Voice Gateway Media Card requires a CompactFlash card to operate The CompactFlash card contains the IP Line 3 1 software CAUTION WITH ESDS DEVICES Wear an antistatic device to avoid damage to the Voice Gateway Media Card The Voice Gateway Media Card package includes the following e Media Card e CompactFlash card and Retaining Pin nylon pillar e Shielded 50 pin to Serial ELAN TLAN adapter The CompactFlash card must be installed on the Voice Gateway Media Card prior to installing the Voice Gateway Media Card in the system Figure 105 on page 331 shows the CompactFlash card location on the Voice Gateway Media Card 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 331 of 488 Figure 105 CompactFlash card location Samisk 72 gt E F CompactFlash card Figure 106 shows the CompactFlash card and Retaining Pin Figure 106 CompactFlash card and Retaining Pin EB mraoaaa anj Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 332 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Procedure 79 Installing the CompactFlash 1 Remove the Media Card CompactFlas
295. sting node on page 219 e Procedure 55 Performing a datadump using Element Manager on page 221 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Page 201 of 488 Enabling the Login Name option Follow Procedure 47 to enable the Login Name option Procedure 47 Enabling the Login Name option 1 Log in to the CS 1000E a Enter the command LOGI b Enter PASS lt xxxx gt Where lt xxxx gt password for the system System response WARNING THE PROGRAMS AND DATA STORED ON THIS SYSTEM ARE LICENSED TO OR ARE THE PROPERTY OF Nortel AND ARE LAWFULLY AVAILABLE ONLY TO AUTHORIZED USERS FOR APPROVED PURPOSES UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO ANY PROGRAM OR DATA ON SYSTEM IS NOT PERMITTED THIS SYSTEM MAY BE MONITORED AT ANY TIME FOR OPERATIONAL REASONS THEREFORE IF YOU ARE NOT AN AUTHORIZED USER DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LOGIN TTY 00 LOGGED IN ADMIN2 16 17 22 10 2002 Gy 2 Enter the command LD 17 System response CFN000 MEM AVAIL U P 1015918 USED U P 138773 24956 TOT 1179647 DISK RECS AVAIL 486 TMDI D CHANNELS AVAIL 0 USED 0 TOT 0 DCH AVAIL 80 USED 0 TOT 80 AML AVAIL 15 USED 1 TOT 16 3 Enter the command CHG Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 202 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server 4 Enter the command TYPE PW
296. system Nortel recommends configuring at least two PTYs for general use rlogin sessions with no user ID In practice a maximum of 14 PTYs can be used leaving 2 TTYs for COM1 and COM2 on the CPU card Login to PTY is case sensitive Every PTY configured is given a user ID PTYx where x is the port number assigned to the PORT prompt If no input is entered for the PORT prompt the default value is the same as the TTY number Nortel recommends using the default value for easy management When an rlogin session is initiated with a user ID the Call Server searches for a free PTY with a matching user ID The search starts with the highest configured PTY number and progresses in descending order of the PTY number If no free PTY with a matching user ID is found the connection is refused In this case TTY012 message is printed on the administration terminal When an rlogin session is initiated with no user ID specified the Call Server searches for a free PTY The search starts from the lowest configured PTY number and progresses in ascending order of the PTY number The first available PTY is used to open the rlogin session In order to minimize the probability of having a PTY configured for a specific application being used for general rlogin sessions PTYs of specific applications are configured to start with the highest TTY number such as 15 and progress in descending order PTYs for general use are configured to start with the lowest number and p
297. system configuration Programming the CS 1000E and MG 1000T systems requires loading different overlay programs and using each one to enter a specific type of information Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 478 of 488 Basic system telephony configuration See Software Input Output Administration 553 3001 311 for information about overlays Flow charts Figure 160 on page 481 shows the programming overlay LD sequence for a new system The Data entry sequence flowchart does not show all possible administration overlays In some cases you must move back and forth between overlays to complete the programming For example you must program the Customer Data Block CDB before you program the attendant console However there are console related prompts in the CDB that cannot be programmed until you have programmed an attendant console Skip the console related prompts complete the CDB programming then return to the CDB after the console is programmed Finish the CDB console related prompts A similar situation exists with the Speed Call lists and the Telephones You must activate the Speed Call list s before you can assign the list s to a telephone Figure 161 on page 482 and Figure 162 on page 483 show overlay titles and gate openers for each feature group A gate opener enables users to program arelated group of features without stepping through all prompts of an overlay NTP references are shown in the
298. t Accessories gt Communication gt HyperTerminal exe 4 Configure HyperTerminal to communicate with the Terminal Server s management port 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting a Terminal Server Page 257 of 488 a Set baud rate to 9600 b Set data bits to 8 c Set parity to none d Set stop bit to 1 e Set flow control to None f Set Terminal Emulation to VT100 g Press lt CR gt until you receive a log in prompt 5 Login to the Terminal Server Enter ACCESS 6 Enter the user name Enter ADMIN 7 Set privileged mode Enter SET PRIV 8 Enter the password Enter SYSTEM End of Procedure Configuring the Terminal Server IP address Procedure 63 Configure IP address for the Terminal Server Note The IP address can be configured or changed only from local management port 20 1 Configure the Terminal Server s IP address At the In Reach_Priv prompt Enter define server ip address ip address 2 Configure the Terminal Server s IP subnet mask Enter define server ip subnet mask ip address 3 Configure the Terminal Server s IP primary gateway address Enter Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 258 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server define server ip primary gateway address ip address 4 Check Terminal Server configuration Enter list server ip Example commands define server ip address 172 16 3 50 define server ip subnet mask 255 255
299. t CAT5 Ethernet cable Power Interface Module PIM with 25 ft console cable IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Quick Reference Card 2 Extension microphones charcoal Universal power supply Additional Extension microphones with 7 ft cable NTEX11DA70 Power accessory kit PIM Universal power supply cabling NTEX11CA IP Phone IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 Power cords Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 403 of 488 NA NEMA 5 15P 125V 13A 10ft NTTK14AB Euro CEE 7 VII 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK16AB ANZ AS3112 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK15AA Swiss SEV 1011 250V 10A 8ft NTTK17AB UK Ireland BS1363 240V 10A 8it NTTK18AB Denmark AFSNIT 250V 10A 2 5m NTTK22AB Argentina IRAM 2073 250V 10A 8ft A0814961 Table 49 lists the Package components for the WLAN Handsets Table 49 WLAN Handset component list Part 1 of 4 WLAN Handset 2210 kit North America NTTQ40AA A0548444 WLAN Handset 2210 kit Global power supply not included NTTQ40BA A0548450 North American kit includes WLAN 2210 Handset NTTQ4010 A0548445 WLAN Handset 2210 Battery Pack NTTQ4050 A0548446 WLAN Handset 2210 Desktop Charger NTTQ4060 A0548447 WLAN 2210 2211 Charger amp Nortel Application Gateway 2246 64 NTTQ4101 A0548449 Power Supply for North America Global kit is the same as the North American kit without the power supply Commun
300. t the installation and given the opportunity to quit at any time Please enter To To go to Quit Choice gt lt b gt N U install Software install Software install Database only install CP BOOTROM only install Keycode only For Feature To install 3900 set Languages Enterprise System CP BOOTROM Database the Tools menu Expansion use OVL143 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 130 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 10 Select option lt b gt To install Software Database CP BOOTROM Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool P lease insert the Removable Media Device into the drive on Core 1 Please enter lt CR gt gt lt a gt RMD is now in drive Continue with s w checking lt q gt Quit Enter choice gt lt CR gt 11 If the RMD containing the software is already in the drive select option lt a gt RMD is now in drive Continue with s w checking or simply press lt CR gt to continue If the RMD is not yet in the drive insert it and then press lt CR gt 12 The system displays the release of the software found on RMD under the swload directory and requests confirmation to continue the installation Communication Server 1000 Software Database IBOOTROM RMD Install Tool The RMD contains Sy
301. t use the telephone near water for example near a tub or sink Do not place the telephone on a piece of furniture that is unstable The telephone can fall causing serious damage to the telephone Slots in the Media Gateway and the telephone are for ventilation These slots protect the equipment from overheating Never block or cover these slots Never block the openings on a telephone by placing it on a surface like a bed sofa or rug Never place a telephone near or over a radiator or heat register Do not place it in a built in installation unless there is correct ventilation Only operate a telephone from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply check with your distributor Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 36 of 488 Safety instructions Some equipment has a three wire grounding plug This type of plug has a third grounding pin As a safety feature the plug only fits into an isolated ground outlet If you cannot insert the plug completely into the outlet contact your electrician to replace the outlet Some equipment has a polarized line plug This type of plug has one blade wider than the other As a safety feature this plug fits into the power outlet one way If you cannot insert the plug completely into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug still does not fit contact your electrician to replace the outlet Do not pl
302. tand Charcoal used for Ethergray and Charcoal models A0891619 IP Phone 2001 2002 2004 Power Adaptors Power transformer 117 120 VAC 50 60 Hz North America A0619627 Power transformer 3 prong AC to AC direct plug in 8W 240 A0656598 VAC 50Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Ireland and Uk Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 230 VAC 50 A0619635 60 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Europe Power transformer 2 prong wall plug direct plug in AC to AC A0647042 8W 240 VAC 50 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Australia and New Zealand Power transformer AC to AC direct plug in 8W 100 VAC 50 A0828858 Hz to 16 VAC at 500 mA Table 46 lists the IP Phone 2004 package components and product codes Table 46 IP Phone 2004 component list Part 1 of 2 IP Phone 2004package contents includes e IP Phone 2004 e Handset e Handset cord e Footstand e 7 ft Ethernet cable e Getting Started card IP Phone 2004 Ethergray with Icon keycaps NTDU92AA16 A0533408 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 400 of 488 Table 46 IP Phone 2004 component list Part 2 of 2 IP Phone 2004 Ethergray with English text label keycaps NTDU92BA16 A0533409 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with Icon keycaps NTDU92AA70 A0533410 IP Phone 2004 Charcoal with English text label keycaps NTDU92BA70 A053341 1 IP Phone 2004
303. tchback from Survival Mode A MG 1000T Expansion can switchback to Normal Mode after communication with the MG 1000T Core is restored The following scenarios can trigger an MG 1000T in Survival Mode to return to Normal Mode e Automatic Switchback AUTOSB enables an MG 1000T to automatically switchback from Survival Mode to Normal Mode as soon as the IP link with the primary controller is restored and the SWOTO timer has expired A restart is initiated on the MG 1000T Expansion At the end of the system start the MG 1000T Expansion is ready to operate in Normal Mode e Manual Switchback enables a technician to force the system into Normal Mode by issuing the SBFS command This command returns the system to Normal Mode after the SOTS command has been used Automatic Switchback from Survival Mode When the Automatic Switchback option is configured a Survivable MG 1000T Expansion automatically switches from Survival Mode to Normal Mode It returns to Normal Mode as soon as the IP link with the primary controller is restored and the SWOTO timer expires A MG 1000T Expansion requires a valid database to be survivable The AUTOSB command is available in LD 117 CHG AUTOSB lt cab gt lt Switchback setting gt Where cab 1 4 Media Gateway Switchback setting YES NO When the switchback parameter is set to YES the MG 1000T Expansion automatically switches from Survival Mode when the SWOTO timer expires If switchback is
304. teway Media Card unit using Element Manager on page 348 Procedure 87 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager on page 349 Procedure 88 Enabling a Voice Gateway Media Card unit using Element Manager on page 350 Configuring a card A Voice Gateway Media Card requires configuration of the IP telephony properties defined with Element Manager the Voice Gateway Media Cards are assigned to an IP telephony node See Configuring an IP telephony node on page 365 the voice gateway channels defined on the CS 1000E See Configuring voice gateway channels using Element Manager on page 325 Adding a card to an IP telephony node The Voice Gateway Media Card is added to an IP telephony node using Element Manager only See Element Manager System Administration 553 3001 332 for details Procedure 76 Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP telephony node 1 2 Log in to Element Manager Select IP Telephony gt Nodes Servers Media Cards gt Configuration from the navigator The Node Configuration web page opens as shown in Figure 99 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 322 of 488 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Figure 99 Node Configuration web page Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration Node Configuration New Node to Add Import Node Files Node 8 Node IP 192 168 253 7 Ed
305. th Count Breakdown ELAN 16 IP 47 11 138 150 Health 2 ELAN 17 IP 47 11 138 153 Health 2 ocal AML over ELAN Total Health 4 Local Total IPL Health 6 IPL connection history 3 3 333333333333 B333 33 Local TIER 2 Health Total 10 Remote Side 1 Inactive Redundant Components without TIER 1 Health contribution disp 1 15 1 In Service sio2 1 15 1 In Service cp 1 16 In Service ipb 1 In Service TIER 1 Health Count Breakdown sio8 1 16 1 0002 sio8 1 16 2 0002 sutl 1 15 0002 strn 1 15 0002 xsmp 1 15 1 0002 eth 1 16 0 0002 Remote TIER 1 Health Total 20 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 146 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E TIER 2 Health Count Breakdown ELAN 16 IP 47 11 138 150 Health 2 ELAN 17 IP 47 11 138 153 Health 2 Remote AML over ELAN Total Health 4 Remote Total IPL health 6 Remote TIER 2 Health Total 10 4 Get status of links to the Media Gateways STAT IPL LD 135 STAT IPL Get status of MG 1000E IPMG Media Gateway 1 LINK UP Media Gateway 2 LINK UP Media Gateway 3 LINK UP Media Gateway 4 LINK UP KEEK Exit the program The system now operates in full redundant mode with Call Server 1 active End of Procedure Complete the CP PIV installation LD 137 modifications The CMDU MMDU commands are not applicable to CP PIV Instead the following commands are
306. the installation terminates after you enter the keycodes but before the installation is complete you can abort the installation with the Clear Upgrade Information option e Confirm Upgrade Information This option enables you to review selected installation options You can use the Confirm Upgrade Information after the system validates the keycodes and before the installation is complete e Set system time and date The system time and date is usually set before installation This makes sure that all flash drive files have the correct creation date IMPORTANT The Software Installation Program must run from TTY 0 port 0 on card 0 On a new system with a pre installed software daughterboard the Software Installation Program runs automatically Feature set and licenses The Software Installation Program enables administrators to install and enable the CS 1000E system A feature set such as Basic Services Advanced Services and Premium Services has an associated list of software packages and licenses The Software Delivery Card can include several preconfigured 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on an MG 1000T Small System Controller Page 243 of 488 feature sets The Software Installation Program also enables administrators to add individual packages from the feature set and change ISM system parameters Additions and changes are keycode controlled Therefore the packages and license
307. through QUA6 PFTU connections A QUA6 PFTU can be used to connect an external alarm through normally open or normally closed contacts of one of its units The contacts operate under the same conditions as the PFTU and can support the capacities listed in Table 61 Table 61 The AC capacities Maximum AC capacities Switching power 50 0 VA Switching voltage 125 0 V rms Switching current 0 5A Figure 155 on page 458 is an example of the contacts on one unit PFT1 of the PFTU The figure also shows the contacts in normal operating mode not in failure mode Table 62 on page 458 provides the connections for all units on the PFTU Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 458 of 488 Installing and cross connecting an external alarm from a PFTU Figure 155 Contacts in PFTU PFT 1 on PFTU 8T R G Normally Normally 7T R O connected connected to a toa trunk line card 8R G R CO trunk 7R O R 6T R BL Normally Normally ST W S connected connected toa toa 6R BL R telephone line card telephone 5R S W Table 62 PFTU connections Part 1 of 3 Normal mode Makes with 6T and 6R Failure mode Opens 6T and 6R Makes with 7T and 7R Makes with 5T and 5R Open Makes with 8T and 8R Opens 8T and 8R Makes with 5T and 5R Makes with 7T and 7R 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Open Installing and cross connecting an
308. to a PFTU on page 450 3 Procedure 117 Connecting a Trunk to a PFTU on page 452 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU Follow Procedure 115 to install and connect a QUA6 PFTU Refer to the equipment layout plan for the location of the PFTU Note The QUA6 PFTU operates with loop start and ground start Central Office trunks With ground start trunks the associated telephone set must have a ground start button Procedure 115 Installing and connecting a QUA6 PFTU 1 Install the PFTU on the wall near the system cross connect terminal Fasten the PFTU in position with four screws 2 Install an NE A25B type 25 pair cable from connector J1 on the faceplate of the PFTU to its assigned location at the cross connect terminal 3 Label the pairs of the J1 cable on the cross connect terminal block as shown in Figure 150 on page 442 Figure 150 J1 cable labels Pairs Pairs Pairs Pairs Pairs Pairs Pairs 1to4 1to4 1to4 1to4 1to4 1to4 1to4 PFT1 PFT2 PFT3 prta PTs RRA Label the pairs on the terminal block as shown If using BIX blocks attach the appropriate designation strip 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Page 443 of 488 4 Connect the PFTU power and control connections to the AUX connector on the Media Gateway See Figure 151 on page 443 and Figure 152 on page 444 Table 56 on page 444 and Figure 153 on page 446 Figure 151 AUX cable connectors
309. triggered when the MG 1000T Expansion loses communication with the primary controller and the Switchover Time Out SWOTO timer expires This can occur if there is a catastrophic failure of the primary controller or the IP link is lost between the MG 1000T Core and the MG 1000T Expansion e Manual Switchover triggered with the Switchover to Survival SOTS command in LD 135 Automatic Switchover to Survival Mode When an MG 1000T with survivability configured loses communication with the primary controller the MG 1000T automatically switches over to Survival Mode when the SWOTO timer expires If the IP link is detected as down again before the expiration of the SWOTO timer the timer stops and the MG 1000T remains in Survival operating mode The state of communication between the primary controller and the MG 1000T Expansion is monitored by a simple polling mechanism called a Heartbeat This example illustrates the tasks performed by an MG 1000T Expansion when communication with the MG 1000T Core is lost 1 The MG 1000T Expansion attempts to re establish the connection to the MG 1000T Core After four re connection attempts with a pre defined delay between each attempt the SWOTO starts 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring MG 1000T survivability and alternate primary controller Page 463 of 488 2 The SWOTO expires after the time defined in LD 117 3 The MG 1000T Expansion re starts As the MG 1000T is goi
310. tstand 3 Port Switch only on the IP Phone 2004 required if a single Ethernet connection is shared with a PC c Ethernet cable from the set to the 3 Port Switch d Power Transformer or Power Splitter for Power over LAN unit Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 421 of 488 e Handset f Handset cord Figure 148 IP Phone 2004 components Three Port Switch Power Transformer connection Power Splitter connection power over LAN CAT5 line e cable of Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Installing and configuring IP Phones Page 422 of 488 Connect one end of the CAT5 line cable to the Ethernet jack at the back of the telephone See Figure 148 on page 421 Connect the other end into the IP voice network Ethernet using an RJ 45 connector See Figure 149 on page 423 WARNING Do not plug the IP Phone into an ISDN connection Severe damage can result Consult the system administrator to ensure that the telephone is being plugged in to a 10 100BaseT Ethernet jack Power the IP Phone with one of the following methods a Using a 16V AC power adaptor plug the AC power transformer into the nearest power outlet Check the IP Phone User Guide for country specific parameters b Using a Power over LAN unit connect the Power over LAN unit as shown in Figure 149 on p
311. tus column provides the progress of the transfer e The Status column displays Starting as the transfer begins see Figure 134 on page 376 e The Status column displays Transfer as the node configuration is transferred to the elements see Figure 135 on page 376 e The Status column displays Complete if the transfer is successful for an element see Figure 136 on page 377 e The Status column displays Fail if the transfer is unsuccessful Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 376 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node Figure 134 Transfer Progress Starting Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Confiquration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Edit Transfer Progress Transfer Progress Transfer in Progress Please Wait 207 179 153 100 Starting 207 179 153 109 Starting F E 207 179 153 111 Starting F E Figure 135 Transfer Progress Transferring Managing 207 179 153 99 IP Telephony Nodes Servers Media Cards Node Configuration IP Telephony Node ID 8 Edit Transfer Progress Transfer Progress Transfer in Progress Please Wait a ae ee 207 179 153 100 Transferring T 207 179 153 109 Transferring T sui 207 179 153 111 Transferring Gy When the file transfer is complete the Transfer Progress web page displays a status of complete see Figure 136 on page 377 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 200
312. uages MENU Enterprise System time CP BOOTROM Database CP BOOTROM Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 138 of 488 Installing software on the CS 1000E 20 The system then prompts you to confirm and reboot Enter lt CR gt to quit Enter lt CR gt again to reboot You selected to quit Please confirm Please enter KCR gt gt lt y gt Yes quit lt n gt No DON T quit Enter choice gt lt CR gt You selected to quit the Install Tool You may reboot the system or return to the Main Menu Please enter KCR gt gt lt a gt Reboot the system lt m gt Return to the Main menu Enter Choice gt lt CR gt gt Removing temporary file u disk3521 sys gt Removing temporary file u disk3621 sys gt Rebooting system At this point the system reloads and initializes End of Procedure 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing software on the CS 1000E Page 139 of 488 Verify the installation database Procedure 23 Verifying the installation database 1 Print ISSP system software issue and patches LD 22 Load program REQ ISSP KREK Exit program Print the system configuration record in LD 22 and compare the output with the preinstallation configuration record LD 22 Load program REQ PRT TYPE CFN FETE Exit program Print the SLT in LD 22 This output provides used and unused LICENSES
313. uaws 6 260 Accessing an MRV Console Port through the on board modem 264 CS TOQUE COM port P65 si cee ees seer ehaetbag esos senses eres 265 Many third party applications require serial port interfaces to provide a connection to a PBX As well support staff traditionally use serial ports to connect maintenance terminals and modems to a system for maintenance As the CS 1000E Call Server provides only two local serial ports for these purposes an IP based Terminal Server is required to provide the necessary standard serial ports for applications As the Terminal Server is configured to automatically log in to the active Call Server upon start up only one Terminal Server is required for the system It can be located anywhere on the LAN One connection from each Call Server COM 1 port is connected to the Terminal Server Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 254 of 488 Connecting a Terminal Server Up to 16 TTY ports can be configured with the CS 1000E Call Server The Terminal Server can be used as a central point to manage several devices through their serial ports The CS 1000E system currently supports the MRV IR 8020M 101 commercial Terminal Server only The MRV IR 8020M 101 Terminal Server is used with the CS 1000E system to provide serial connections for accessing the CS 1000E COM ports The user can access each COM port from a local PC through telnet sessions or from a remote PC by dialing the on boar
314. uration Page 450 of 488 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Procedure 116 Connecting an analog 500 2500 type telephone to a PFTU 1 Locate the telephone terminations on the cross connect terminal 2 Connect one end of the cross connect wire to the leads of the telephone 3 Locate the PFTU connections unit PFTU 1 through PFTU 5 assigned to this telephone at the cross connect terminal See Table 58 on page 450 4 Connect the other end of the cross connect wire to the pair assigned to the telephone on the PFTU 5 Connect a second cross connect wire to the pair assigned to the Line card on the PFTU 6 Locate the Line card terminations on the cross connect terminal 7 Connect the other end of the cross connect wire to the assigned TN terminal block Table 58 Power Fail Transfer Unit connections Part 1 of 3 QUA6 J1 Cable Function Pair Color Connects to Telephone Telephone Line card Central Office Trunk Trunk Line card 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and cross connecting a Power Fail Transfer Unit Page 451 of 488 Table 58 Power Fail Transfer Unit connections Part 2 of 3 QUA6 J1 Cable Function Pair Color Connects to Telephone Telephone Line card Central Office Trunk Trunk Line card Telephone Telephone Line card Central Office Trunk Trunk Line card Telephone Telephone Line card Central Off
315. using the line circuits and if required from the AUX cable In addition to the primary TN secondary TN and ASMTN two TNs are for power from the AUX cable are cabled to the M2250 through the AUX and AUX leads Maximum loop length is 3000 ft 915 m of 24 AWG 5 0 Metric Wire Gauge Note 2 When additional options are used BLF an additional 16V DC power supply is required The 16V DC source is cabled through VPS and VPS RTN leads The maximum distance from the console to the power source is 120 ft 36 m of 24 AWG 5 0 Metric Wire Gauge wire 553 8352 EPS 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Page 393 of 488 Table 43 Color combinations of cable pairs End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 394 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 395 of 488 Installing and configuring IP Phones Contents This section contains information on the following topics INGCINCNON soi ac iced Gee e GRA ee RREKRERE ARDS ERERDEAE SWS 396 Configuring VoIP bandwidth management zones 408 Configuring virtual superloops 1 21 0 e0 ess anes runnen 410 Configuring an IP Phone using LD 11 2 02 42s ese ce eeeseoaedens 411 Setting administrator and temporary IP Telephone Installer passwords 417 Installing IP Phone hardwar
316. ver This procedure describes how to install the server in a rack 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Rack mounting the components Page 87 of 488 Read the following warnings carefully before you begin installing the Signaling Server in the rack DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DISCONNECT AC POWER The Signaling Server must be completely disconnected from any AC power source before performing this procedure Pressing the Power button DOES NOT turn off power to this Signaling Server Some circuitry in the unit can continue to operate even though the front panel Power button is off Failure to disconnect the Signaling Server from its AC power source can result in personal injury or equipment damage DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK GROUNDING THE RACK INSTALLATION To avoid the potential for an electrical shock hazard include a third wire safety grounding conductor with the rack installation If Signaling Server power cords are plugged into AC outlets that are part of the rack then provide proper grounding for the rack itself If Signaling Server power cords are plugged into wall AC outlets the safety grounding conductor in each power cord provides proper grounding for the Signaling Server only Provide additional proper grounding for the rack and other devices installed in it Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 88 of 488 Rack mounting the components WARNING MAIN AC POWER DISCONNECT A main AC
317. ver Backup web page appears see Figure 138 on page 381 4 Select Backup from the Action drop down list box 5 Click Submit The message displays indicating Backup in progress Please wait 6 Click OK in the EDD complete dialog box The Backup function displays information in a tabular form indicating the actions that were performed End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 382 of 488 Configuring an IP telephony node 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 383 of 488 Installing Line cards and cross connecting telephones Contents This section contains information on the following topics TNC INION ci oeis rareo e EPROR Beem atocegaraaeicwe 383 Card placement in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expansion 386 ross connecting telephones i 2cac is kencisenctheneakanseas 386 Connecting a telephone withouta PFTU 388 Connecting an off premise telephone 005 389 Connecting an attendant console 22s0cccc00024482 44008 o00082 391 Introduction This chapter contains instructions for connecting telephone Line cards located in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander to the MDF cross connect terminal This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 98 Cross connecting telephones on page 386 e Procedure 99 Connecting a telephone without a PFTU on page 389 e Procedure 100 Connecting an off premise telephone
318. ver installation only It does not have the current CONFIG INI file that contains the CS 1000E IP address Subsequent FTPs succeed 6 Transfer the node files again so that the Follower Signaling Server obtains a copy of CONFIG INI 7 Reboot the Follower Signaling Server so that all its applications can start based on the new CONFIG INI file The Signaling Server uses BooiP to obtain its network data and it then FTPs the BOOTP TAB file from the node master Leader Signaling Server End of Procedure Performing a datadump Follow Procedure 97 to perform a datadump using Element Manager This procedure is an alternative to using CLI to perform a datadump The datadump backs up new IP Telephony node files on the CS 1000E at the same time that it backs up the customer database Procedure 97 Performing a datadump using Element Manager From within Element Manager see Figure 93 on page 370 for details on logging in do the following 1 Choose Services gt Backup and Restore gt Call Server from the navigator 2 The Call Server Backup and Restore web page opens as shown in Figure 80 on page 223 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Configuring an IP telephony node Page 381 of 488 Figure 138 CS 1000E Backup Managing 207 179 153 99 Services Backup and Restore Call Server Backup and Restore Call Server Backup Call Server Backup Action Backup Submit Cancel 3 Select Backup The Call Ser
319. vity while the second cable provides CE MUX connectivity to slot 10 only Procedure 41 Connecting a Media Gateway to a Media Gateway Expansion 1 Connect one NTDK95 cable from the CE MUX connector on the back of the Media Gateway to the CE MUX connector on the back of the Media Gateway Expander Tighten the screws on the connectors 3 Connect the other NTDK95 cable from the DS 30X connector on the back of the Media Gateway to the DS 30X connector on the back of the Media Gateway Expander 4 Tighten the screws on the connectors Figure 46 on page 167 shows the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander connected with the two NTDK95 cables 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Connecting MG 1000T system components Page 167 of 488 Figure 46 Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expander connections I NTDK95 cables CE MUX connector DS 30X connector End of Procedure Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 168 of 488 Connecting MG 1000T system components 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Page 169 of 488 Installing and configuring the Signaling Server software Contents Introduction This section contains information on the following topics roditi eon dace week bigaes eeasredauwgatoseeteaweiend 169 Signaling Server Software Install Tool 0 0 169 Signaling Server Software CD ROM 04 170 Installing hesola 5 0 ciccbrieds cdc
320. way channels DSPs to transcode voice data between IP and TDM analog digital The card s node properties as well as the voice gateway channels must be configured The cards are installed in a Media Gateway or a Media Gateway Expander The Voice Gateway Media Card is represented by a Media Card 32 Port IP Line 3 1 Voice Gateway For details see ZP Line Description Installation and Operation 553 3001 365 This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 76 Adding a Voice Gateway Media Card to an IP telephony node on page 321 e Procedure 77 Adding voice gateway channels using Element Manager on page 325 e Procedure 78 Configuring voice gateway channels using LD 14 on page 328 e Procedure 79 Installing the CompactFlash on page 332 e Procedure 80 Installing a Voice Gateway Media Card in a card slot on page 338 e Procedure 81 Displaying the Voice Gateway Media Card status on page 340 e Procedure 82 Displaying the Voice Gateway status for all voice gateway channels on page 341 553 3041 210 Standard 4 00 September 2007 Installing and configuring a Voice Gateway Media Card Page 321 of 488 Procedure 83 Displaying the status of Voice Gateway Media Card units on page 344 Procedure 84 Displaying the status of one unit on a Voice Gateway Media Card on page 347 Procedure 85 Disabling a Voice Gateway Media Card using Element Manager on page 347 Procedure 86 Disabling a Voice Ga
321. y coc eog dewey asenyseedsaneavasens cues 221 Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 200 of 488 Configuring the CS 1000E Call Server Introduction The CS 1000E system requires the configuration of an IP telephony node The configuration data is stored in the BOOTP TAB and CONFIG_INI files on the CS 1000E Copies of both files are maintained on each node component Signaling Server and Media Card The preconfigured IP telephony configuration files from the leader Signaling Server must be imported These files are saved on the CS 1000E as e c u db node nodex cfg where x is the node number e c u db node nodex btp where x is the node number IMPORTANT Do not attempt to alter the configuration files either manually or with OTM s ITG or IP Phone management Use Element Manager only The node database files are backed up along with the customer database using the LD 43 EDD command This chapter contains the following procedures e Procedure 47 Enabling the Login Name option on page 201 e Procedure 48 Configuring login IDs and passwords on page 203 e Procedure 49 Enabling the multi user option on page 206 e Procedure 50 Configuring pseudo terminals PTYs on page 207 e Procedure 51 Checking PTY status on page 209 e Procedure 52 Configuring MG 1000E Bandwidth Management Zone on page 211 e Procedure 53 Launching Element Manager on page 216 e Procedure 54 Importing an exi
322. yStack 470 Switch The BayStack 470 Switch described in Table 7 on page 61 provides policy enabled networking features to optimize consistent performance and behavior of network traffic The Differentiated Services DiffServ network architecture offers varied levels of service for different types of data traffic DiffServ lets you designate a specific level of performance on a per packet basis Table 7 BayStack 470 Switch profile Part 1 of 2 Property Description 1 U 1 U 1 3 4 inch or 4 4 cm Power status LED indicator on the left side of the unit s faceplate Power cord connector is located at the left rear of the unit Power supplies are factory installed and not customer replaceable Unit does not support DC input Communication Server 1000E Installation and Configuration Page 62 of 488 System components Table 7 BayStack 470 Switch profile Part 2 of 2 Property Description Cooling e Forced air cooling with side to side air flow e The three fans run whenever the unit is on Card slots e None Connectors e Unit is DCE for serial port connection to PC front requires null modem for Terminal Server connection Console port default settings 9600 baud with 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity as the communications format with flow control set to enabled 10BaseT 100BaseTX Ru 45 8 pin modular port connectors For additional information refer to Using the BayStack 470

Nortel Networks 1000E Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents